WO2022267962A1 - Screen area control method and apparatus, sending card, and storage medium - Google Patents

Screen area control method and apparatus, sending card, and storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022267962A1
WO2022267962A1 PCT/CN2022/098995 CN2022098995W WO2022267962A1 WO 2022267962 A1 WO2022267962 A1 WO 2022267962A1 CN 2022098995 W CN2022098995 W CN 2022098995W WO 2022267962 A1 WO2022267962 A1 WO 2022267962A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
sending card
information
network port
routing
sending
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/098995
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
范进华
Original Assignee
广州视源电子科技股份有限公司
西安青松光电技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 广州视源电子科技股份有限公司, 西安青松光电技术有限公司 filed Critical 广州视源电子科技股份有限公司
Publication of WO2022267962A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022267962A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/14Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/14Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units
    • G06F3/147Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units using display panels
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L67/00Network arrangements or protocols for supporting network services or applications
    • H04L67/01Protocols
    • H04L67/12Protocols specially adapted for proprietary or special-purpose networking environments, e.g. medical networks, sensor networks, networks in vehicles or remote metering networks
    • H04L67/125Protocols specially adapted for proprietary or special-purpose networking environments, e.g. medical networks, sensor networks, networks in vehicles or remote metering networks involving control of end-device applications over a network

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of computer technology, and in particular to a screen area control method, device, sending card and storage medium.
  • Light-emitting diodes are a commonly used light-emitting device that can efficiently convert electrical energy into light energy.
  • Light-emitting diodes can be used in the field of screen control.
  • LED lights can be used to form an LED display to display various information such as text, images, and videos.
  • multiple sending cards can be used to control the LED display. Each of the sending cards can control a part of the display area of the LED display, so as to realize the control of the entire LED display.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a screen area control method, device, sending card, and storage medium, which can improve screen control efficiency and convenience of screen area control.
  • the technical scheme of the embodiment of the present application is as follows:
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a screen area control method, which is applied to a first sending card, and the first sending card includes a routing module, a first routing network port, and a first sending card network port.
  • the method include:
  • the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information
  • the screen area corresponding to the first sending card is controlled to perform a display operation, and the area control information is transmitted through the first sending card.
  • the card network port is obtained from the terminal.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a screen area control device, the screen area control device includes a routing module, a first routing network port and a first sending card network port, and the device includes:
  • a type obtaining unit configured to obtain transmission information based on the routing module, and obtain the information type of the transmission information
  • An information transmission unit configured to transmit the returned information to the terminal via the first routing network port and the first sending card network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information;
  • a display operation unit configured to control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, and the area control information is Obtained from the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
  • a method for controlling a screen area is applied to a sending card, where the sending card includes a routing module, a first routing network port, and a second routing network port, and the method includes:
  • the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information
  • the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information
  • the routing network port transmits to the routing module.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a screen area control device, the screen area control device includes a routing module, a first routing network port, and a second routing network port, and the device includes:
  • a transmission information obtaining unit configured to obtain transmission information based on the routing module, and obtain the information type of the transmission information
  • a return information transmission unit configured to transmit the return information to the terminal through the second routing network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, and the return information is passed through the Obtained by the above-mentioned first routing network port;
  • the area control unit is configured to control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, and the area control information is the area control information
  • the terminal is transmitted to the routing module through the second routing network port.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a sending card, which may include: a processor and a memory; wherein, the memory stores a computer program, and the computer program is adapted to be loaded by the processor and execute the above-mentioned method steps .
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, where a plurality of instructions are stored in the computer storage medium, and the instructions are adapted to be loaded by a processor and execute the above-mentioned method steps.
  • the information type of the transmission information is obtained. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the return information is passed through the first routing network port and the second routing network port. 1. The network port of the sending card is transmitted to the terminal. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, the screen area corresponding to the first sending card is controlled to perform display operations. The area control information is transmitted through the network port of the first sending card. obtained from the terminal.
  • the first sending card when it obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, it can use the network transmission method for information transmission without using the serial port method to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information, reduce the screen control time, and increase the screen control speed.
  • the first sending card is provided with a routing module, which can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic background diagram of a screen area control method according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic background diagram of a screen area control method according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic flowchart of a screen area control method provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a display screen according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic flowchart of a screen area control method provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 9 shows a system architecture diagram of a screen control method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 11 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 12 shows a schematic flowchart of a screen area control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 shows a system architecture diagram of a screen control method according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 14 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 16 shows a schematic flowchart of a screen area control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a method for transmitting regional control information according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 19 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application
  • Fig. 22 shows a schematic structural diagram of a screen area control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 23 shows a schematic structural diagram of a screen area control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 24 shows a schematic structural diagram of a screen area control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 25 shows a schematic structural diagram of a screen area control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 26 shows a schematic flowchart of a screen area control method provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 27 shows a schematic background diagram of a screen area control method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 28 shows a system architecture diagram of a screen area control method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 29 shows a schematic flowchart of a screen area control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 30 shows a schematic structural diagram of a screen area control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 31 shows a schematic structural diagram of a screen area control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 32 is a schematic structural diagram of a sending card provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • plural means two or more.
  • “And/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B may indicate: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists independently.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or” relationship.
  • Light-emitting diodes are a commonly used light-emitting device that can efficiently convert electrical energy into light energy.
  • Light-emitting diodes can be used in the field of screen control.
  • LED lights can be used to form an LED display to display various information such as text, images, and videos.
  • multiple sending cards can be used to control the LED display.
  • Each of the sending cards can control a part of the display area of the LED display, so as to realize the control of the entire LED display.
  • the sending card cascading includes but not limited to serial port cascading, network cascading, network and serial port combined cascading and so on.
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic background diagram of a method for controlling a screen area according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • multiple sending cards are cascaded through the network.
  • the router is respectively connected to the terminal and the network port of each sending card.
  • the connection between the terminal and the sending card is very complicated, and the network address of the sending card needs to be set to a fixed network address in advance, and only one sending card can be used at the same time, and the terminal needs to be set to the same Only the network address of the network segment can carry out information transmission, so the screen control steps are complicated, which makes the screen area control less convenient.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic background diagram of a method for controlling a screen area according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • multiple sending cards are cascaded through the network and serial port, that is, sending card 1 and sending card 2 are connected to the router, sending card 3 is connected to sending card 1 through the serial port, and sending card 4 is connected to sending card 2 through the serial port , that is, the input serial port of sending 3 is connected to the output serial port of sending card 1, and the input serial port of sending 4 is connected to the output serial port of sending card 2.
  • it is necessary to separately set network addresses for sending card 1 and sending card 2 and the number of information transmission steps is limited. That is, all sending cards need to be transferred when communicating between the underlying sending card and the terminal.
  • a screen area control method is proposed, which can be realized by relying on a computer program and can run on a sending card including a routing module.
  • the computer program can be integrated in the application, or run as an independent utility application.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are applied to the first sending card, that is, the executor of the embodiments of the present application is the first sending card.
  • the first sending card does not specifically refer to a certain fixed sending card.
  • Sending card refers to the integrated board used to process and distribute information.
  • a sending card can usually control at least one screen area.
  • the first sending card includes a routing module, a first routing network port and a first sending card network port.
  • the routing network port refers to the network port connected to the routing module, and the first routing network port refers to the network port used to connect the routing module and the first sending card.
  • the network port of the sending card refers to the network port set by the sending card itself, and the network port of the sending card is not directly connected to the routing module.
  • the network port of the first sending card refers to the network port set on the first sending card itself.
  • the network port of the first sending card does not refer to a fixed network port. When the first sending card changes, the network port of the first sending card will change accordingly.
  • the routing module refers to a modular router.
  • the type of the routing module is determined based on the connection function and the management function. For example, when the type of the network port changes, the routing module will also change accordingly.
  • the first sending card includes a routing module, and when controlling the screen area corresponding to the first sending card, based on the routing module, the first sending card can acquire transmission information.
  • the first sending card may obtain the information type of the transmission information.
  • the information type refers to the attribute of the information transmission direction of the transmission information, and the information type does not specifically refer to a certain fixed information type. For example, when the transmission information changes, the information type corresponding to the transmission information will also change accordingly.
  • the returned information refers to information obtained by the first sending card and to be transmitted to the terminal.
  • the return information obtained by the first sending card may be generated directly based on the user's return instruction, and may also be the return information transmitted to the first sending card by the second sending card.
  • the first sending card can obtain the transmission information.
  • the first sending card may acquire the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card may transmit the return information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port.
  • the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation.
  • the area control information refers to information acquired by the first sending card and instructing the first sending card to perform a display operation on the screen area corresponding to the first sending card.
  • the area control information is acquired by the first sending card from the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
  • the first sending card can obtain the transmission information.
  • the first sending card may acquire the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then based on the area control information, the first sending card may control a screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation.
  • FIG. 4 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a display screen in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the screen areas corresponding to the first sending card are area 1 and area 4 .
  • the area control information acquired by the first sending card is to display the meeting time in area 1 and the conference subject in area 4 .
  • the first sending card acquires the area control information, the first sending card can display the meeting time in area 1 and the meeting theme in area 4 .
  • the information type of the transmission information is obtained. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the return information is passed through the first routing network port and the second routing network port. 1. The network port of the sending card is transmitted to the terminal. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, the screen area corresponding to the first sending card is controlled to perform display operations. The area control information is transmitted through the network port of the first sending card. obtained from the terminal.
  • the first sending card when it obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, it can use the network transmission method for information transmission without using the serial port method to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information, reduce the screen control time, and increase the screen control speed.
  • the first sending card is provided with a routing module, which can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application. specific:
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be used for the control of LED display screens, or other scenarios where sending card cascade control is used.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be used in scenes where the screen resolution of the LED display screen is relatively large, and the screen resolution refers to the number of pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions.
  • the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application may be used in a scene with a screen resolution of 1600*1200.
  • the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set, that is, the first sending card does not specifically refer to a certain fixed sending card.
  • a collection is a collection of concrete or abstract objects with certain properties.
  • the sending card set refers to the set formed by at least one sending card.
  • the sending card set includes at least one first sending card.
  • the first sending card Before the first sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, the first sending card may obtain the sorting information of the first sending card.
  • the sorting information is used to indicate the sorting of the first sending card in the sending card set. Since different sending cards have different execution steps when receiving the area control information or returning the information, obtaining the sorting information of the first sending card can improve the accuracy of screen area control and the convenience of screen control.
  • the ordering of at least one first sending card in the sending card set may be determined based on the distance between the first sending card and the terminal, that is, the one closest to the terminal is the first sending card, and the farthest connected to the terminal is the last sending card.
  • the first sending card and the terminal can be directly connected, or connected through an external router.
  • the sorting information of sending card 1 is first
  • the sorting information of sending card 3 is second.
  • sorting information does not specifically refer to certain fixed information.
  • the sorting information is determined by the number of first sending cards included in the sending card set. When the number of the first sending card in the sending card set changes, the sorting information of the first sending card will also change accordingly.
  • the first sending card may acquire the sorting information of the first sending card.
  • the sorting information obtained by the first sending card may be, for example, the sending card ranked first, or the sending card ranked last.
  • the second sending card is the next sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, that is, the second sending card refers to the sending card in the sending card set that is adjacent to the first sending card and is far away from the terminal next sending card.
  • the second sending card does not specifically refer to a certain fixed sending card. For example, when the first sending card changes, the second sending card will also change accordingly.
  • the network port of the second sending card is a network port provided on the second sending card itself, and the network port of the second sending card is not directly connected to the routing module of the second sending card.
  • the second sending card is the next sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, and the second routing network port of the first sending card is connected to the network port of the second sending card. Therefore, after the first sending card in the sending card set is determined, the sending card corresponding to the second sending card network port connected to the second routing network port of the first sending card may be determined as the second sending card.
  • the network address refers to the logical address of the network port, where one network port corresponds to one network address.
  • the network address of a network port does not specifically refer to a fixed network address.
  • the network address may be modified based on the received network address modification instruction.
  • the first network address refers to the address of the network port configured by the first sending card to control the routing module to the first routing network port.
  • the second network address refers to when the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, the first sending card controls the routing module to the second sending card of the second sending card through the second routing network port.
  • the address configured by the network port of the sending card Since the first sending card can obtain the address modification instruction, the first network address and the second network address do not specifically refer to a certain fixed address.
  • the first sending card may determine whether the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set.
  • the first sending card determines that the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, that is, the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is not the last sending card in the sending card set
  • the first sending card can control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and configure the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card through the second routing network port.
  • the second routing network port of the first sending card is not configured with a network address.
  • the sending cards whose information is sorted from the first to the last in the sending card set may be, for example, a Q sending card, a W sending card, an E sending card, an R sending card, and a T sending card.
  • the first sending card may be, for example, a W sending card
  • the second sending card may be, for example, an E sending card.
  • W sending card includes w routing module, first routing network port w1 routing network port, second routing network port w2 routing network port, first sending card network port w3 sending card network port
  • E sending card includes second sending card network port The e3 sending card network port is connected to the w2 routing network port.
  • the W sending card can control the w routing module to configure the first network address for the w1 routing network port.
  • the first network address may be, for example, an Internet Protocol (Internet Protocol, IP) address, and the first network address may be, for example, 123.12.123.12.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • the W sending card configures the second network address to the second sending card network port e3 of the sending card network port of the second sending card E via the second routing network port w2.
  • the second network address may be, for example, an IP address, and the second network address may be, for example, 123.12.123.13.
  • the first sending card when the first sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, the first sending card may obtain the information type of the transmission information based on the network port for obtaining the transmission information. For example, when the routing module obtains the transmission information through the second routing network port of the first sending card, the routing module and the first routing network port, the first sending card may determine that the information type of the transmission information is the return information type. When the routing module obtains the transmission information through the network port of the first sending card, the first sending card may determine that the information type of the transmission information is the area control information type.
  • the first sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module. If the sorting information obtained by the first sending card indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, that is, sorting The information indicates that the first sending card is not the last sending card in the sending card set, and the routing module is controlled to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and send the second network address to the second sending card through the second routing network port. After the network port of the sending card is configured with the second network address, the first sending card can obtain the transmission information.
  • the first sending card when the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, that is, the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is not the last sending card in the sending card set , the first sending card can obtain the return information through the first routing network port.
  • the return information is the information transmitted by the second sending card to the routing module through the network port of the second sending card and the second routing network port of the first sending card.
  • the first sending card can acquire the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card may obtain the return information through the first routing network port. Specifically, the first sending card may acquire the returned information based on the first network address. For example, the W sending card may acquire the return information based on the first network address 123.12.123.12.
  • the first sending card when the first sending card acquires the transmission information, the first sending card may acquire the information type of the first transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card obtains the return information through the first routing network port. When the first sending card obtains the returned information through the first routing network port, the first sending card may transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first sending card network port.
  • FIG. 6 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the routing module of the W sending card obtains the return information transmitted by the E sending card through the second routing network port w2 of the W sending card and the e3 sending card network port of the E sending card
  • the W sending card can pass the first
  • the routing network port w1 obtains the returned information from the routing module.
  • the W sending card may transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first sending card network port w3 sending card network port.
  • the first sending card may also directly obtain the returned information, that is, the returned information is generated by the first sending card, not transmitted by the second sending card.
  • the first sending card may transmit the generated return information to the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
  • the W sending card receives the return instruction from the user, the W sending card can generate the return information.
  • the W sending card obtains the returned information, the W sending card may transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first sending card network port w3 sending card network port.
  • the first sending card may acquire the information type of the transmission information.
  • the area control information is obtained by the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card. If the first sending card determines that the information type of the transmission information indicates that the transmission information is regional control information, then the first sending card can send the regional control information through the first routing network port, the routing module, the second routing network port and the second sending card.
  • the network port transmits to the second sending card.
  • FIG. 7 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the W sending card when the W sending card obtains the area control information transmitted by the Q sending card through the second routing network port q2 routing network port of the Q sending card and the w3 sending card network port, the W sending card can pass the area information through the first routing network port The w1 routing network port transmits to the w routing module.
  • the W sending card can control the w routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card E sending card through the second routing network port w2 routing network port.
  • the W sending card can control the w routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card E sending card through the second routing network port w2 routing network port and the e3 sending card network port of the second sending card E sending card .
  • the first sending card when controlling the screen area corresponding to the first sending card for display operation, can analyze the area control information and obtain the area control information The collection of identifiers in . If the identification code set includes the identification code of the first sending card, the first sending card may control the corresponding screen area of the first sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can use a single command to control the screen area, which can improve the convenience of screen area control.
  • the identification code is used to uniquely represent the sending card.
  • the set of identification codes is a collection of at least one identification code.
  • the set of identification codes may include combination codes or identification codes of a single sending card.
  • the identification codes of one of the sending cards may belong to different combination codes.
  • the identification code of the Q sending card is 1, the identification code of the W sending card is 2, the identification code of the E sending card is 3, the identification code of the R sending card is 4, and the identification code of the T sending card is 5.
  • the identification code set may be 12345, for example, the identification code set may be 12, 45, and the identification code set may be 1, 2, 3, for example.
  • the first sending card may parse the area control information and obtain the set of identification codes in the area control information.
  • the set of identification codes acquired by the Q sending card may be 12345, for example.
  • the Q sending card determines that the set of identification codes includes the identification code 1 of the Q sending card, the Q sending card can control the corresponding screen area of the Q sending card to perform display operations based on the area control information.
  • the sorting information of the first sending card is obtained, and if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, the routing module is controlled to Configure the first network address on the first routing network port, and configure the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card through the second routing network port, which can reduce the configuration steps of the network address and improve the efficiency of screen area control .
  • the transmission information is obtained based on the routing module, and the information type of the transmission information is obtained. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the return information is obtained through the first routing network port, and the return information is transmitted through the first sending card network port. The information is transmitted to the terminal.
  • the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information
  • the area control information will be sent through the first routing
  • the network port, the routing module, the second routing network port and the second sending card network port are transmitted to the second sending card, so when the first sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, it can use the network transmission method for information transmission without using the serial port
  • the way to obtain transmission information can increase the transmission speed of transmission information, reduce the time of screen control, and increase the speed of screen control.
  • the first sending card is equipped with a routing module, it can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and increase the screen area. Convenience of control.
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application. specific:
  • sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, obtain the third network address configured by the external router to the network port of the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card;
  • the first sending card when the first sending card acquires the sorting information of the first sending card, the first sending card may determine whether the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set.
  • the sorting information obtained by the first sending card may be, for example, that the sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set.
  • FIG. 9 shows a system architecture diagram of a screen control method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the executive subject of the embodiment of the present application is the first sending card, which is the first sending card in the sending card set, and the first sending card is connected to the The external router is connected with the terminal.
  • the first sending card can be connected to the external router through the network port of the first sending card through a network cable.
  • the external router can be connected to the terminal through a network cable.
  • the sorting information obtained by the first sending card indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, and the first sending card is connected to the external router through the network port of the first sending card, then The external router can configure the third network address to the first routing network port. If the first sending card detects that the external router configures the third network address to the first sending card network port, the first sending card can obtain the third network address configured by the external router to the first sending card network port through the first sending card network port. address.
  • the third network address refers to the network address configured by the external router to the network port of the first sending card when the first sending card network port of the first sending card is connected to the external router.
  • the third network address does not specifically refer to a certain fixed network address.
  • the external router may modify the third network address based on the address modification instruction.
  • the first sending card may be, for example, a Q sending card
  • the second sending card may be, for example, a W sending card.
  • the q1 sending card network port of the Q sending card is connected to the external router P router
  • the second routing network port q2 routing network port of the Q sending card is connected to the w3 sending card network port of the W sending card.
  • the external router configures the network address of the q1 sending card network port of the Q sending card, that is, the Q sending card can obtain the third network address configured by the external router for the q1 sending card network port through the q1 sending card.
  • the third network address may be 123.89.76.678, for example.
  • the second routing network port of the first sending card is connected to the network port of the second sending card, the second sending card is the next sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, and the second sending card
  • the network port of the card is the network port set by the second sending card itself.
  • the second sending card network port does not specifically refer to a fixed sending card network port. For example, when the second sending card changes, the network port of the second sending card will also change accordingly.
  • the first sending card can determine whether the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set. If the first sending card determines that the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, then the first sending card can control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and through the first sending card The second routing network port configures the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card.
  • the sending cards whose information is sorted from the first to the last in the sending card set may be, for example, a Q sending card, a W sending card, an E sending card, an R sending card, and a T sending card.
  • the first sending card may be, for example, a Q sending card.
  • Q sending card includes q routing module, first routing network port q1 routing network port, second routing network port q2 routing network port, first sending card network port q3 sending card network port, W sending card includes second sending card network port The w3 sending card network port is connected to the w2 routing network port.
  • the Q sending card can control the q routing module to configure the first network address for the q1 routing network port.
  • the first network address may be, for example, an IP address, and the first address may be, for example, 123.12.123.12.
  • the Q sending card configures the second network address to the second sending card network port w3 of the sending card network port of the second sending card W via the second routing network port q2.
  • the second network address may be, for example, an IP address, and the second address may be, for example, 123.12.123.13.
  • the first sending card may obtain the return information through the first routing network port.
  • the return information is the information transmitted by the second sending card to the routing module through the network port of the second sending card and the second routing network port of the first sending card.
  • the first sending card can acquire the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card may obtain the return information through the first routing network port. Specifically, the first sending card may acquire the returned information based on the first network address. For example, the Q sending card can obtain the W sending card to transmit the return information based on the first network address 123.12.123.12.
  • the first sending card when the first sending card acquires the transmission information, the first sending card may acquire the information type of the first transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card obtains the return information through the first routing network port. When the first sending card obtains the backhaul information through the first routing network port, the first sending card may transmit the backhaul information to the external router through the first sending card network port. When the external router acquires the return information transmitted by the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card, the external router may transmit the return information to the terminal.
  • FIG. 10 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the Q sending card can route from the routing module q through the q1 routing network port.
  • the returned information is obtained in the module.
  • the Q sending card can transmit the return information to the external router through the first sending card network port q3 sending card network port.
  • the external router acquires the return information transmitted by the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card, the external router may transmit the return information to the M terminal.
  • the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method to transmit the return information, without using the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the return information and reduce the transmission time of the return information.
  • the sending card is equipped with a routing module, which can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
  • the first sending card when the first sending card obtains the transmission information, the first sending card may obtain the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card may obtain the return information through the first routing network port. When the first sending card obtains the backhaul information through the first routing network port, the first sending card may transmit the backhaul information to the external router through the first sending card network port. Specifically, the second sending card may transmit the return information to the routing module of the first sending card based on the second network address of the network port of the second sending card and the second routing network port of the first sending card. The first sending card may acquire the return information in the routing module based on the first network address.
  • the first sending card may send the return information to the external router based on the third network address of the network port of the first sending card.
  • the external router can configure a fifth network address for the network port of the terminal before obtaining the returned information, so when the external router obtains the returned information, the external router can transmit the returned information to the terminal based on the fifth network address.
  • the Q sending card may transmit the return information to the q routing module of the Q sending card based on the second network address 123.12.123.13 of the w3 sending card network port and the q2 routing network port of the Q sending card's second routing network port.
  • the Q sending card can obtain the return information in the routing module based on the first network address 123.12.123.12 of the routing network port of q1.
  • the Q sending card may transmit the return information to the external router based on the third network address 123.89.76.678 of the first sending card network port q3 sending card network port.
  • the external router can configure a fifth network address for the network port of the terminal before obtaining the returned information, and the fifth network address can be 45.15. 5.
  • the network address 45.15.126.125 transmits the return information to the M terminal.
  • the first sending card may acquire the information type of the transmission information.
  • the area control information is obtained by the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card, and the area control information is transmitted by the terminal to the first sending card through the external router and the network port of the first sending card. If the first sending card determines that the information type of the transmission information indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the first sending card may transmit the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port.
  • FIG. 11 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the Q sending card obtains the area control information sent by the external router through the q3 sending card network port
  • the Q sending card can transmit the area information to the q routing module through the first routing network port q1 routing network port.
  • the first sending card when the area control information is transmitted to the routing module through the first routing network port, the first sending card may be based on the third network address of the first sending card network port Obtain the zone control information sent by the external router. When the first sending card acquires the area control information, the first sending card may send the area control information to the routing module based on the first network address.
  • the Q sending card when the Q sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port, the Q sending card can send the card based on the first sending card network port w3
  • the third network address 123.89.76.678 of the network port obtains the area control information sent by the external router.
  • the Q sending card may send the area control information to the q routing module based on the first network address 123.12.123.12.
  • S308 controlling the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port;
  • the first sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port.
  • the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
  • the Q sending card transmits the area control information to the q routing module through the first routing network port q1 routing network port.
  • the Q sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second routing network port q2 routing network port and the second sending card network port q3 sending card network port W Send card.
  • the first sending card when the first sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module, the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port Specifically, the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card based on the second network address of the second routing network port and the second network port of the second sending card.
  • the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method to transmit the area control information without using the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the area control information, reduce the screen control time, and increase the screen control speed.
  • the first sending card is provided with a routing module, which can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
  • the execution sequence of steps S307, S308 and step 309 can be performed simultaneously, that is, when the first sending card controls the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform display operations based on the area control information, the first sending card can The area control information is transmitted to the second sending card.
  • the sorting information of the first sending card is obtained. If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, the external The router configures the third network address to the network port of the first sending card. If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, the routing module is controlled to configure the first network address to the first routing network port. , and configure the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card through the second routing network port. It is not necessary to connect each sending card to the external router, only the first sending card is connected to the external router. Simplifying the complexity of the structure of the screen control device and simplifying the screen control device can improve the convenience of screen control.
  • the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method for information transmission, without using the serial port method to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information, reduce the screen control time, and improve the screen control speed.
  • the module can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
  • FIG. 12 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application. specific:
  • the first sending card when the first sending card acquires the sorting information of the first sending card, the first sending card may determine whether the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set.
  • the sorting information obtained by the first sending card may be, for example, that the sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set.
  • FIG. 13 shows a system architecture diagram of a screen control method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the executive subject of the embodiment of the present application is the first sending card, which is the first sending card in the sending card set, and the first sending card is connected to the terminal.
  • the first sending card may be connected to the terminal through a network port of the first sending card through a network cable.
  • the first sending card may configure the fourth network address to the network port of the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
  • the fourth network address refers to the network address configured by the first sending card control routing module to the terminal network port when the first sending card network port of the first sending card is connected to the terminal network port of the terminal.
  • the fourth network address does not specifically refer to a certain fixed network address. For example, when the first sending card receives an address modification instruction for the fourth network address, the first sending card may modify the fourth network address based on the address modification instruction.
  • the Q sending card can configure the fourth network address to the terminal network port through the first sending card network port q3 sending card network port.
  • the fourth network address may be, for example, 123.89.76.698.
  • the first The sending card can also receive address modification instructions. Based on the address modification instruction, the first network address is modified to obtain a modified first network address, and the first network segment corresponding to the modified first network address is the same as the second network segment corresponding to the fourth network address, so as to improve The speed of information transmission improves the accuracy of information transmission.
  • the address modification instruction includes but is limited to a voice modification instruction, a click modification instruction, and the like.
  • the first sending card can obtain the first network segment corresponding to the first network address and the second network segment corresponding to the fourth network address . If the first network segment is inconsistent with the second network segment, the first sending card may send a prompt message and receive an address modification instruction for the prompt message. For example, the first sending card can send a prompt message to the host computer, and the host computer can send an address modification instruction to the first sending card based on the prompt message.
  • the second routing network port of the first sending card is connected to the network port of the second sending card, the second sending card is the next sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, and the second sending card
  • the network port of the card is the network port of the second sending card.
  • the second sending card network port does not specifically refer to a fixed sending card network port. For example, when the second sending card changes, the network port of the second sending card will also change accordingly.
  • the first sending card can determine whether the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set. If the first sending card determines that the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, then the first sending card can control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and through the first sending card The second routing network port configures the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card.
  • the sending cards whose information is sorted from the first to the last in the sending card set may be, for example, a Q sending card, a W sending card, an E sending card, an R sending card, and a T sending card.
  • the first sending card may be, for example, a Q sending card.
  • Q sending card includes q routing module, first routing network port q1 routing network port, second routing network port q2 routing network port, first sending card network port q3 sending card network port, W sending card includes second sending card network port The w3 sending card network port is connected to the w2 routing network port.
  • the Q sending card can control the q routing module to configure the first network address for the q1 routing network port.
  • the first network address For example, it may be an IP address, and the first address may be, for example, 123.12.123.12.
  • the Q sending card configures the second network address to the second sending card network port w3 of the sending card network port of the second sending card W via the second routing network port q2.
  • the second network address may be, for example, an IP address, and the second address may be, for example, 123.12.123.13.
  • the first sending card may obtain the return information through the first routing network port.
  • the return information is the information transmitted by the second sending card to the routing module through the network port of the second sending card and the second routing network port of the first sending card.
  • the first sending card can acquire the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card may obtain the return information through the first routing network port. Specifically, the first sending card may acquire the returned information based on the first network address. For example, the Q sending card can obtain the W sending card to transmit the return information based on the first network address 123.12.123.12.
  • the first sending card when the first sending card acquires the transmission information, the first sending card may acquire the information type of the first transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card obtains the return information through the first routing network port. When the first sending card obtains the returned information through the first routing network port, the first sending card may transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first sending card network port.
  • the network transmission method can be used to transmit the returned information through the network port of the first sending card, and there is no need to use the serial port to obtain the transmitted information, which can increase the transmission speed of the returned information and reduce the transmission time of the returned information.
  • the first sending card is provided with a routing module, which can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
  • FIG. 14 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the Q sending card can obtain it from the routing module through the q1 routing network port. to the return information.
  • the Q sending card may transmit the returned information to the M terminal through the network port w3 of the sending card of the first sending card.
  • the first sending card when the first sending card acquires the transmission information, the first sending card may acquire the information type of the first transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first routing network port of the first sending card acquires the return information. When the first sending card obtains the returned information through the first routing network port, the first sending card may send the returned information to the terminal through the first sending card network port.
  • the second sending card may transmit the return information to the routing module of the first sending card based on the second network address of the network port of the second sending card and the second routing network port of the first sending card.
  • the first sending card may acquire the return information in the routing module based on the first network address.
  • the first sending card may send the returned information to the terminal based on the third network address of the network port of the first sending card.
  • the Q sending card can transmit the return information to the q routing module of the Q sending card based on the second network address 123.12.123.13 of the network port of the second sending card and the second routing network port q2 routing network port of the Q sending card .
  • the Q sending card can obtain the return information in the q routing module based on the first network address 123.12.123.12 of the q1 routing network port.
  • the Q sending card may send the returned information to the M terminal based on the third network address 123.89.76.678 of the first sending card network port q3 sending card network port.
  • the first sending card may acquire the information type of the transmission information.
  • the area control information is obtained by the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card, and the area control information is transmitted by the terminal to the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card. If the first sending card determines that the information type of the transmission information indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the first sending card may transmit the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port.
  • FIG. 15 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the Q sending card obtains the area control information sent by the terminal through the q3 sending card network port
  • the Q sending card can transmit the area information to the q routing module through the first routing network port q1 routing network port.
  • the first sending card when the area control information is transmitted to the routing module through the first routing network port, the first sending card may be based on the third network address of the first sending card network port Obtain the zone control information sent by the external router. When the first sending card acquires the area control information, the first sending card may send the area control information to the routing module based on the first network address.
  • the Q sending card when the Q sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port, the Q sending card can transmit the information based on the first sending card network port q3 sending card The third network address 123.89.76.678 of the network port obtains the area control information sent by the external router.
  • the Q sending card may send the area control information to the q routing module based on the first network address 123.12.123.12.
  • S408 controlling the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port;
  • the first sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port.
  • the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
  • the network transmission method can be used to control the routing module to transmit the area control information through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port, without using the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can improve the transmission speed of the area control information and reduce
  • the screen control time improves the screen control speed.
  • the steps of network address setting can be reduced, the steps of screen control can be reduced, and the convenience of screen area control can be improved.
  • the Q sending card transmits the area control information to the q routing module through the first routing network port q1 routing network port.
  • the Q sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second routing network port q2 routing network port and the second sending card network port q3 sending card network port W Send card.
  • the first sending card when the first sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module, the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port Specifically, the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card based on the second network address of the second routing network port and the second network port of the second sending card.
  • the sorting information of the first sending card is obtained, and if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, then the network port of the first sending card is sent to the terminal The network port is configured with the fourth network address. If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, the routing module is controlled to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and through the second routing network Configure the second network address to the network port of the second sending card on the second sending card. Therefore, in the scenario where there is no external router, the first sending card can configure the network address of the terminal network port, so that the first sending card can communicate with the terminal.
  • the network transmission method transmits information without using the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information, reduce the screen control time, and improve the screen control speed.
  • there is no need for complicated wiring between the terminal and the sending card which can simplify the screen control device.
  • the complexity of the structure and the simplification of the screen control device can improve the convenience of the screen control.
  • the steps of network address setting can be reduced, the steps of screen control can be reduced, and the convenience of screen area control can be improved.
  • FIG. 16 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application. specific:
  • the first sending card when the first sending card obtains the sorting information of the first sending card, the first sending card can determine whether the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card and the last sending card in the sending card set.
  • a sending card When the first sending card determines that the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, the first sending card controls the routing module to the first routing
  • the network port is configured with the first network address
  • the network port of the second sending card of the second sending card is configured with the second network address through the second routing network port.
  • the second routing network port of the first sending card is not configured with a network address.
  • the sending cards whose information is sorted from the first to the last in the sending card set may be, for example, a Q sending card, a W sending card, an E sending card, an R sending card, and a T sending card.
  • the first sending card may be, for example, a W sending card
  • the second sending card may be, for example, an E sending card
  • the third sending card may be a Q sending card.
  • W sending card includes w routing module, first routing network port w1 routing network port, second routing network port w2 routing network port, first sending card network port w3 sending card network port
  • E sending card includes second sending card network port The e3 sending card network port is connected to the w2 routing network port.
  • the W sending card can control the w routing module to configure the first network address for the w1 routing network port.
  • the first network address For example, it may be an IP address, and the first address may be, for example, 123.12.123.12.
  • the W sending card configures the second network address to the second sending card network port e3 of the sending card network port of the second sending card E via the second routing network port w2.
  • the second network address may be, for example, an IP address, and the second address may be, for example, 123.12.123.13.
  • the The routing network port obtains the return information
  • the first sending card when the first sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, the first sending card may obtain the information type of the transmission information. For example, when the routing module obtains the transmission information through the second routing network port of the first sending card, the routing module and the first routing network port, the first sending card may determine that the information type of the transmission information is the return information type. When the first sending card determines that the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card may obtain the return information through the first routing network port.
  • the return information is the information transmitted by the second sending card to the routing module of the first sending card through the network port of the second sending card and the second routing network port of the first sending card.
  • the first sending card may acquire the returned information based on the first network address. For example, the W sending card may acquire the return information based on the first network address 123.12.123.12.
  • S505 transmit the returned information to the third sending card through the network port of the first sending card and the third routing network port of the third sending card;
  • the third sending card is the last sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, that is, the third sending card refers to the sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set and close to the terminal The previous sent card.
  • the third sending card does not specifically refer to a certain fixed sending card. For example, when the first sending card changes, the third sending card will also change accordingly.
  • the first sending card may obtain the information type of the first transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card obtains the return information through the first routing network port.
  • the first sending card may transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first sending card network port.
  • the first sending card may transmit the returned information to the third sending card through the network port of the first sending card and the third routing network port of the third sending card.
  • the third sending card may transmit the returned information to the terminal.
  • the third routing network port is connected to the first sending card network port, and the return information is transmitted by the second sending card through the second sending card network port and the second routing port.
  • the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method to transmit the return information through the network port of the first sending card and the third routing network port of the third sending card. It is not necessary to use the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can improve the return transmission rate.
  • the speed of information transmission reduces the transmission time of returned information.
  • the steps of network address setting can be reduced, the steps of screen control can be reduced, and the convenience of screen area control can be improved.
  • FIG. 17 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the routing module of the W sending card obtains the return information transmitted by the E sending card through the second routing network port w2 of the W sending card and the e3 sending card network port of the E sending card
  • the W sending card can pass the first
  • the routing network port w1 obtains the returned information from the w routing module.
  • the W sending card can transmit the return information to the third sending card Q sending card through the first sending card network port w3 sending card network port.
  • the Q sending card can transmit the return information to the M terminal.
  • the The routing network port transmits the area control information to the routing module
  • the first sending card when the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, the first sending card can obtain the information type of the transmission information .
  • the area control information is transmitted by the third sending card through the third routing network port of the third sending card and the first sending card network port, wherein the third routing network port is connected to the first sending card network port. If the first sending card determines that the information type of the transmission information indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the first sending card may transmit the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port.
  • FIG. 18 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the W sending card obtains the area control information transmitted by the Q sending card through the w3 sending card network port through the second routing network port q2 routing network port of the Q sending card
  • the W sending card can pass the area information through the first routing network port
  • the w1 routing network port transmits to the w routing module.
  • the first sending card when the first sending card determines that the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, and the first sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port, the first sending card may be based on the first network The address transmits the area control information to the routing module, that is, the first sending card can transmit the area control information to the first routing network port corresponding to the first network address, and then to the routing module.
  • the first sending card if the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, and the information type of the transmission information obtained by the first sending card indicates the transmission information If it is regional control information, the first sending card transmits the regional control information to the routing module through the first routing network port.
  • the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
  • the network transmission method can be used to control the routing module to transmit the area control information through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port, without using the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can improve the area control information.
  • the transmission speed reduces the screen control time and improves the screen control speed.
  • the network address setting steps can be reduced, the screen control steps can be reduced, and the convenience of screen area control is improved.
  • the W sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, and the information type of the transmission information obtained by the W sending card indicates that the transmission information is area control information
  • the W sending card transmits the area control information to the w routing module via the first routing network port w1 routing network port.
  • the W sending card can control the routing module to transmit the regional control information to the routing module via the second routing network port w2 routing network port and the second sending card network port e3 E Send card.
  • the first sending card when the first sending card can transmit the area control information to the routing module based on the first network address, the first sending card can control the routing module to transfer the area control information to the routing module via the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
  • the information is transmitted to the second sending card.
  • the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second routing network port, and then transmit the area control information to the network port of the second sending card corresponding to the second network address , the network port of the second sending card is set on the second sending card, and the second sending card can receive the area control information transmitted by the first sending card.
  • the sorting information of the first sending card is acquired, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card Sending card, then control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and configure the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card through the second routing network port, without connecting each sending card To an external router, the complexity of the structure of the screen control device can be simplified, and the convenience of screen control can be improved by simplifying the screen control device.
  • the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method for information transmission, without using the serial port method to obtain the transmission information, reducing the impact on the information transmission speed during the multi-level card sending connection, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information and reduce the screen control time.
  • the speed of screen control is improved, and at the same time, since the first sending card is provided with a routing module, the steps of network address setting can be reduced, the steps of screen control can be reduced, and the convenience of screen area control can be improved.
  • FIG. 19 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application. specific:
  • the first sending card when the first sending card obtains the sorting information of the first sending card, the first sending card can determine whether the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set. If the first sending card determines that the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, the first sending card may control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port.
  • the sending cards whose information is sorted from the first to the last in the sending card set may be, for example, a Q sending card, a W sending card, an E sending card, an R sending card, and a T sending card.
  • the first sending card may be, for example, a T sending card.
  • the third sending card may be, for example, an R sending card.
  • T sending card includes t routing module, first routing network port t1 routing network port, second routing network port t2 routing network port, first sending card network port t3 sending card network port, R sending card includes fourth routing network port r2 Routing network port, r2 routing network port and t3 sending card network port are connected.
  • the T sending card can control the t routing module to configure the first network address for the t1 routing network port.
  • the first network address For example, it may be an IP address, and the first address may be, for example, 123.12.123.12.
  • the first sending card may directly obtain the returned information, that is, the returned information is generated by the last sending card, not transmitted by other sending cards.
  • the first sending card can pass the return information through the network port of the first sending card and the third sending card through the network port of the first sending card.
  • the fourth routing network port transmits to the third sending card.
  • the third sending card is the last sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, that is, the third sending card refers to the last sending card in the sending card set that is adjacent to the first sending card and close to the terminal. Card.
  • the fourth routing network port is connected to the first sending card network port.
  • FIG. 20 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the T-sending card receives the return instruction from the user, the T-sending card can generate the return information.
  • the W sending card can transmit the return information through the network port t3 of the first sending card and the fourth routing network port r2 of the third sending card R sending card. To the third sending card R sending card.
  • the last sending card in the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method to transmit the return information through the network port of the first sending card and the third routing network port of the third sending card, without using the serial port method to obtain Transmission of information can increase the transmission speed of returned information and reduce the transmission time of returned information.
  • the first sending card is equipped with a routing module, it can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control. sex.
  • the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to display operate.
  • the area control information refers to information acquired by the first sending card and instructing the first sending card to perform a display operation on the screen area corresponding to the first sending card.
  • the area control information is acquired by the first sending card from the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
  • the first sending card obtains the sorting information, and based on the sorting information determines that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, the first sending card can obtain the third sending card via the third routing network port and The transmission information transmitted by the network port of the first sending card. If the first sending card obtains the information type of the transmission information, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then the first sending card can control the corresponding screen area of the first sending card to perform display operations based on the control information .
  • the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method to obtain the area control information, without using the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the area control information, reduce the screen control time, and increase the screen control speed.
  • the card is equipped with a routing module, which can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
  • the first sending card is the last sending card and the transmission information is area control information, there is no need to transmit the area control information, which can reduce the duration of screen control and improve the convenience of screen control.
  • FIG. 21 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the T sending card obtains the sorting information and determines that the T sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set based on the sorting information
  • the T sending card can obtain the R sending card via the fourth routing network port r2 routing network port and The network port t3 of the first sending card sends the transmission information transmitted by the network port of the sending card.
  • the T-sending card obtains the information type of the transmission information, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information
  • the T-sending card can control the corresponding screen area of the T-sending card to perform display operations based on the control information.
  • the sorting information of the first sending card is obtained, and if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, the routing module is controlled to send the first sending card to the first routing network port
  • the first network address is configured, the sending card does not need to be connected to an external router, the complexity of the structure of the screen control device can be simplified, the screen control device can be simplified, and the convenience of screen control can be improved.
  • the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method for information transmission, without using the serial port method to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information, reduce the screen control time, and improve the screen control speed.
  • the module can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
  • FIG. 22 shows a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for controlling a screen area provided by an exemplary embodiment of the present application.
  • the device for controlling the screen area can be implemented as all or a part of the device through software, hardware or a combination of the two.
  • the screen area control device 2200 includes a routing module, a first routing network port and a first sending card network port, and the screen area control device 2200 includes a type acquisition unit 2201, an information transmission unit 2202 and a display operation unit 2203, wherein:
  • a type acquiring unit 2201 configured to acquire the transmission information based on the routing module, and acquire the information type of the transmission information
  • the information transmission unit 2202 is configured to transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information;
  • the display operation unit 2203 is used to control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information.
  • the area control information is sent from the terminal via the network port of the first sending card acquired.
  • FIG. 23 shows a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for controlling a screen area according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first sending card also includes a second routing network port
  • the screen area control device 2200 also includes a network address configuration unit 2204, which is used to obtain transmission information based on the routing module, and before obtaining the information type of the transmission information, obtain sorting information of the first sending card;
  • the routing module is controlled to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and send the first network address to the second routing network port through the second routing network port.
  • the network port of the second sending card of the second sending card is configured with the second network address, and the second routing network port is connected to the network port of the second sending card.
  • the second sending card is the next one adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set. send card.
  • FIG. 24 shows a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for controlling a screen area according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the display operation unit 2203 includes an information transmission subunit 2213 and a display operation subunit 2223.
  • the display operation unit 2203 is used to control the first When performing display operations on the screen area corresponding to the sending card:
  • the information transmission subunit 2213 is used to transmit the area control information through The first routing network port, the routing module, the second routing network port and the second sending card network port are transmitted to the second sending card;
  • the display operation subunit 2223 is configured to control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information.
  • the first sending card is connected to the external router through the network port of the first sending card, and the external router is connected to the terminal.
  • the network address configuration unit 2204 is used to obtain the transmission information based on the routing module. Before obtaining the information type of the transmission information, Also specifically for:
  • the information transmission unit 2202 is configured to transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, specifically for:
  • the return information is transmitted to the external router through the network port of the first sending card, and the return information is used to instruct the external router to transmit the return information to the terminal.
  • the information transmission subunit 2213 is configured to transmit the area control information to the When the second sending card is used specifically for:
  • the regional control information is transmitted to the routing module through the first routing network port, and the regional control information is transmitted by the acquisition terminal through the external router and the first sending card network port;
  • the control routing module transmits the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
  • the network port of the first sending card is connected to the terminal network port of the terminal, and the network address configuration unit 2204 is configured to obtain the transmission information based on the routing module. Before obtaining the information type of the transmission information, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card If it is the first sending card in the sending card set, configure the fourth network address to the network port of the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
  • FIG. 25 shows a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for controlling a screen area according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the screen area control device 2200 also includes an address modifying unit 2205, configured to send an address to After the terminal network port is configured with the fourth network address, it receives an address modification instruction;
  • the first network address is modified to obtain a modified first network address, and the first network segment corresponding to the modified first network address is the same as the second network segment corresponding to the fourth network address.
  • the information transmission unit 2202 is configured to transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, specifically for:
  • the return information is transmitted to the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
  • the information transmission subunit 2213 is configured to send the area control information to When the second sending card is used specifically for:
  • the regional control information is transmitted to the routing module through the first routing network port, and the regional control information is transmitted by the acquisition terminal through the first sending card network port;
  • the control routing module sends the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
  • the information transmission unit 2202 is configured to transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, specifically for:
  • the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then the first routing network Port to obtain the return information;
  • the return information is transmitted to the third sending card through the network port of the first sending card and the third routing network port of the third sending card, and the third routing network port is connected to the network port of the first sending card, and the returned information is the second sending card.
  • the card transmits through the network port of the second sending card and the second routing port;
  • the third sending card is the last sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set.
  • the information transmission subunit 2213 is configured to send the area control information to When the second sending card is used specifically for:
  • the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information
  • the first routing network The area control information is transmitted to the routing module through the port; the area control information is transmitted by the third sending card through the third routing network port of the third sending card and the network port of the first sending card, and the third routing network port and the network port of the first sending card port connection, the third sending card is the last sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set;
  • the control routing module sends the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
  • the network address configuration unit 2204 is configured to, after obtaining the sorting information of the first sending card, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, then control the routing module to the first sending card
  • the routing network port is configured with the first network address.
  • the information transmission unit 2202 is configured to transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, specifically for:
  • the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then the return information will be passed through the network port of the first sending card and the third sending card of the third sending card.
  • the third routing network port transmits to the third sending card
  • the third sending card is the last sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, and the third routing network port is connected to the network port of the first sending card.
  • the information transmission subunit 2213 is configured to control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, specifically for:
  • the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card for display operation.
  • the display operation unit 2203 is configured to control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, specifically for:
  • the screen area corresponding to the first sending card is controlled to perform a display operation based on the area control information.
  • the screen area control device provided in the above-mentioned embodiments executes the screen area control method
  • the division of the above-mentioned functional modules is used as an example for illustration.
  • the above-mentioned functions can be assigned to different function modules as required Module completion means that the internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above.
  • the screen area control device provided in the above embodiments and the screen area control method embodiments belong to the same idea, and the implementation process thereof is detailed in the method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the type acquisition unit acquires the transmission information based on the routing module, and acquires the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the information transmission unit passes the return information through the first A routing network port and the network port of the first sending card are transmitted to the terminal. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the display operation unit controls the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform display operations based on the area control information. The area control The information is obtained from the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
  • the screen area control device when it obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, it can use the network transmission method for information transmission without using the serial port method to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information, reduce the screen control time, and increase the screen control speed.
  • the first sending card is provided with a routing module, which can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
  • FIG. 26 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application. specific:
  • FIG. 27 shows a schematic background diagram of a screen area control method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the speed of information transmission is affected by the speed of the serial port. For example, when using 115200 baud rate to transmit information, only 14k per second can be transmitted. Therefore, the information transmission method shown in 27 has a slow information transmission speed, resulting in poor control of the screen area.
  • FIG. 28 shows a system architecture diagram of a screen area control method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application includes only one sending card and one terminal.
  • routing network port refers to the network port connected to the routing module
  • first routing network port refers to the network port used to connect the routing module and the sending card.
  • a routing module refers to a modular router. The type of the routing module is determined based on the connection function and the management function. For example, when the type of the network port changes, the routing module will also change accordingly.
  • the sending card includes a routing module, and when controlling the screen area corresponding to the sending card, the sending card can obtain transmission information based on the routing module.
  • the sending card can obtain the information type of the transmission information.
  • the information type refers to the type of the transmitted information, and the information type does not specifically refer to a certain fixed information type. For example, when the transmission information changes, the information type corresponding to the transmission information will also change accordingly.
  • the returned information refers to the information acquired by the sending card and transmitted to the terminal.
  • the return information obtained by the sending card can be obtained directly based on the user's return instruction, or it can be a return instruction entered by the user through the corresponding screen area of the sending card, or it can be a return instruction generated by the sending card itself .
  • the return instruction generated by the sending card itself may be, for example, a return instruction generated when the sending card detects that the display operation of controlling the screen area corresponding to the sending card is completed.
  • the sending card can obtain the transmission information.
  • the sending card can obtain the information type of the transmission information. If the sending card determines that the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the sending card may transmit the return information to the terminal through the second routing network port.
  • the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform a display operation.
  • the area control information refers to information acquired by the sending card and instructing the sending card to perform a display operation on the screen area corresponding to the sending card.
  • the area control information is transmitted by the terminal to the routing module through the second routing network port, that is, the sending card can obtain the area control information sent by the terminal through the second routing network port.
  • the sending card can obtain the transmission information.
  • the sending card can obtain the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, the sending card can control the corresponding screen area of the sending card to perform display operations.
  • the user can input area control information on the terminal, the area control information includes but not limited to control information input in the form of voice, control information input in the form of text and control information input in the form of clicking, or other terminal transmission to the terminal information and so on.
  • the terminal may transmit the area control information to the sending card via the terminal network port and the second routing network port.
  • the sending card acquires the area control information, it can control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform display operations based on the area control information.
  • the information type of the transmission information is obtained. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the return information is transmitted to the For the terminal, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, the screen area corresponding to the sending card is controlled to perform display operations, and the network transmission method can be used for information transmission, and there is no need to use the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can improve the transmission efficiency.
  • the transmission speed of information reduces the screen control time and improves the screen control speed.
  • the first sending card is equipped with a routing module, it can reduce the network address setting steps, reduce the screen control steps, improve the convenience of screen area control, and expand the screen area. The scope of application of the control.
  • FIG. 29 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application. specific:
  • the sending card may control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port.
  • the first network address refers to a network address corresponding to the first routing network port, and the first network address does not specifically refer to a certain fixed network address.
  • the routing module can be controlled to configure the first network address to the first routing network port once, and the first network address configured twice adjacently can be different.
  • the second routing network port of the Q sending card is connected to the terminal network port of the M terminal through a network cable.
  • the Q sending card can control the q routing module to configure the first network port address to the q1 routing network port.
  • the sending card may control the routing module to configure the second network address to the terminal network port through the second routing network port.
  • the second routing network port of the sending card is connected to the terminal network port. If the sending card is provided with a network port of the sending card, the network port of the sending card does not need to be used in this embodiment.
  • S801 and S802 may be executed simultaneously, or S802 may be executed before S801.
  • the returned information is obtained through the first routing network port.
  • the sending card can obtain the information type of the transmission information. If the sending card determines that the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the sending card can obtain the second network address, and transmit the return information to the terminal network port corresponding to the second network address through the second routing network port, so that The sending card can transmit the returned information to the terminal.
  • the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform a display operation.
  • the terminal when the terminal obtains the information transmission instruction, the terminal may transmit the information to the first sending card through the second routing network port based on the second network address of the terminal network port.
  • the sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, the sending card can obtain the information type of the transmission information. If the sending card determines that the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, it will control the corresponding screen area of the sending card to perform display operations based on the area control information.
  • the routing module is controlled to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and the routing module is controlled to configure the second network address to the terminal network port through the second routing network port.
  • Transmission information to obtain the information type of the transmission information, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then transmit the return information to the terminal through the second routing network port, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then based on the area Control information, control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform display operations.
  • the routing module can configure the network address to the network port of the terminal, so that the terminal and the sending card can use the network transmission method for information transmission, without using the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information and reduce
  • the screen control time improves the screen control speed.
  • the network address setting steps can be reduced, the screen control steps can be reduced, the convenience of screen area control is improved, and the scope of application of screen area control is expanded.
  • FIG. 30 shows a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for controlling a screen area provided by an exemplary embodiment of the present application.
  • the device for controlling the screen area can be implemented as all or a part of the device through software, hardware or a combination of the two.
  • the screen area control device 3000 includes a routing module, a first routing network port, and a second routing network port.
  • the screen area control device 3000 includes a transmission information acquisition unit 3001, a return information transmission unit 3002, and an area control unit 3003, wherein:
  • the transmission information obtaining unit 3001 is configured to obtain the transmission information based on the routing module, and obtain the information type of the transmission information;
  • the return information transmission unit 3002 is configured to transmit the return information to the terminal through the second routing network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, and the return information is obtained through the first routing network port;
  • the area control unit 3003 is used to control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform display operations based on the area control information if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, and the area control information is transmitted to the routing module by the terminal through the second routing network port of.
  • FIG. 31 shows a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for controlling a screen area according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the screen area control device 3100 also includes an address configuration unit 3104, configured to obtain transmission information based on the routing module, and control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port before obtaining the information type of the transmission information ;
  • the control routing module configures the second network address to the terminal network port through the second routing network port, and the second routing network port is connected to the terminal network port.
  • the transmission information is obtained by the transmission information acquisition unit based on the routing module, and the information type of the transmission information is obtained. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the return information transmission unit will return The information is transmitted to the terminal through the second routing network port, and the returned information is obtained through the first routing network port. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is regional control information, the regional control unit controls the screen corresponding to the sending card based on the regional control information. The display operation is carried out in the area, and the area control information is transmitted from the terminal to the routing module through the second routing network port.
  • the terminal and the screen area control device can use the network transmission method for information transmission, and there is no need to use the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can improve the transmission information.
  • the transmission speed reduces the screen control time and improves the screen control speed.
  • the first sending card is equipped with a routing module, it can reduce the network address setting steps, reduce the screen control steps, improve the convenience of screen area control, and expand the screen area control. scope of application.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer storage medium, the computer storage medium can store a plurality of instructions, the instructions are suitable for being loaded and executed by the processor
  • the screen area control method of the illustrated embodiment, the specific execution process can refer to the specific description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 3-21 or 26-29, and details are not repeated here.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product stores at least one instruction, and the at least one instruction is loaded and executed by the processor as shown in the above-mentioned Fig. 3-Fig. 21 or Fig. 26- Fig. 29
  • the specific execution process can refer to the specific description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 3-21 or 26-29, and details are not repeated here.
  • the sending card 3200 may include: at least one processor 3201 , at least one network interface 3204 , a user interface 3203 , a memory 3205 , and at least one communication bus 3202 .
  • the communication bus 3202 is used to realize connection and communication between these components.
  • the user interface 3203 may include a display screen, and the optional user interface 3203 may also include a standard wired interface and a wireless interface.
  • the network interface 3204 may optionally include a standard wired interface and a wireless interface (such as a WI-FI interface).
  • the processor 3201 may include one or more processing cores.
  • the processor 3201 uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts in the entire sending card 3200, by running or executing instructions, programs, code sets or instruction sets stored in the memory 3205, and calling data stored in the memory 3205 to execute Various functions of the sending card 3200 and processing data.
  • the processor 3201 may adopt at least one of Digital Signal Processing (Digital Signal Processing, DSP), Field-Programmable Gate Array (Field-Programmable Gate Array, FPGA), and Programmable Logic Array (Programmable Logic Array, PLA). implemented in the form of hardware.
  • DSP Digital Signal Processing
  • FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array
  • PLA Programmable Logic Array
  • the processor 3201 may integrate one or a combination of a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, CPU), an image processor (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU) and a modem.
  • CPU Central Processing Unit
  • GPU Graphics Processing Unit
  • the CPU mainly handles the operating system, user interface and application programs, etc.
  • the GPU is used to render and draw the content that needs to be displayed on the display screen
  • the modem is used to handle wireless communication. It can be understood that, the above-mentioned modem may also not be integrated into the processor 3201, but implemented by a single chip.
  • the memory 3205 may include random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), and may also include read-only memory (Read-Only Memory).
  • the memory 3205 includes a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium (non-transitory computer-readable storage medium).
  • the memory 3205 may be used to store instructions, programs, codes, sets of codes or sets of instructions.
  • the memory 3205 may include a program storage area and a data storage area, wherein the program storage area may store instructions for implementing an operating system, instructions for at least one function (such as a touch function, a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), Instructions and the like for implementing the above method embodiments; the storage data area can store the data and the like involved in the above method embodiments.
  • the memory 3205 may also be at least one storage device located away from the aforementioned processor 3201 .
  • the memory 3205 as a computer storage medium may include an operating system, a network communication module, a user interface module, and an application program for controlling a screen area.
  • the user interface 3203 is mainly used to provide the user with an input interface to obtain the data input by the user; and the processor 3201 can be used to call the application program for controlling the screen area stored in the memory 3205, And specifically implement the specific descriptions of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 3-21 or 26-29 , and details are not repeated here.
  • the structure of the sending card shown in the above drawings does not constitute a limitation on the sending card, and the sending card may include more or less components than those shown in the illustration, or combine certain some components, or a different arrangement of components.
  • the sending card also includes components such as a radio frequency circuit, an input unit, a sensor, an audio circuit, a wireless fidelity (WiFi) module, a power supply, and a Bluetooth module, which will not be repeated here.
  • WiFi wireless fidelity
  • the execution subject of each step may be the sending card described above.
  • the execution subject of each step is the operating system of the sending card.
  • the operating system may be an Android system, an IOS system, or other operating systems, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the sending card of the embodiment of the present application can also be equipped with a display device on it, and the display device can be various devices that can realize display functions, such as: a cathode ray tube display (cathode ray tube display, CR for short), a light emitting diode display (light -emitting diode display, referred to as LED), electronic ink screen, liquid crystal display (liquid crystal display, referred to as LCD), plasma display panel (plasma display panel, referred to as PDP), etc. Users can use the display device on the sending card to view displayed text, images, videos and other information.
  • a cathode ray tube display cathode ray tube display, CR for short
  • a light emitting diode display light -emitting diode display, referred to as LED
  • electronic ink screen liquid crystal display (liquid crystal display, referred to as LCD), plasma display panel (plasma display panel, referred to as PDP), etc.
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • PDP plasma display panel
  • the sending card can be a smart phone, a tablet computer, a game device, an AR (Augmented Reality, augmented reality) device, a car, a data storage device, an audio playback device, a video playback device, a notebook, a desktop computing device, a wearable device such as an electronic Watches, electronic glasses, electronic helmets, electronic bracelets, electronic necklaces, electronic clothing and other equipment.
  • the disclosed device can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components can be combined or can be Integrate into another system, or some features may be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some service interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit is realized in the form of a software function unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable memory.
  • the essence of the technical solution of the present application or the part that contributes to the related technology or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of software products, and the computer software products are stored in a memory, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned memory includes: U disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), mobile hard disk, magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes.
  • the program can be stored in a computer-readable memory, and the memory can include: flash memory disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access device (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk, etc.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Computing Systems (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer And Data Communications (AREA)

Abstract

The present application relates to the technical field of computers, and in particular, to a screen area control method and apparatus, a sending card, and a storage medium. The screen area control method is applied to a first sending card. The first sending card comprises a routing module, a first routing network port, and a first sending card network port. The method comprises: obtaining transmission information on the basis of the routing module, and obtaining the information type of the transmission information; if the information type indicates that the transmission information is backhaul information, transmitting the backhaul information to a terminal by means of the first routing network port and the first sending card network port; and if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, controlling, on the basis of the area control information, a screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation, the area control information being obtained from the terminal by means of the first sending card network port. According to the present application, the convenience of screen area control can be improved while improving the screen control efficiency.

Description

屏幕区域控制方法、装置、发送卡及存储介质Screen area control method, device, sending card and storage medium
本申请要求在2021年06月21日提交中国专利局,申请号为202110687631.5的中国专利申请的优先权,该申请的全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with application number 202110687631.5 submitted to the China Patent Office on June 21, 2021, the entire content of which is incorporated in this application by reference.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及计算机技术领域,尤其涉及一种屏幕区域控制方法、装置、发送卡及存储介质。The present application relates to the field of computer technology, and in particular to a screen area control method, device, sending card and storage medium.
背景技术Background technique
随着科学技术的发展,发光二极管(Light-Emitting Diode,LED)应运而生,发光二极管是一种常用的发光器件,可以高效地将电能转化为光能。发光二极管可以应用于屏幕控制领域,例如可以使用LED灯组成LED显示屏,用来显示文字、图像、视频等各种信息。在LED显示屏显示信息时,可以使用多张发送卡组合控制该LED显示屏。其中每张发送卡可以控制LED显示屏的一部分显示区域,以便实现对整个LED显示屏的控制。With the development of science and technology, light-emitting diodes (Light-Emitting Diode, LED) came into being. Light-emitting diodes are a commonly used light-emitting device that can efficiently convert electrical energy into light energy. Light-emitting diodes can be used in the field of screen control. For example, LED lights can be used to form an LED display to display various information such as text, images, and videos. When displaying information on the LED display, multiple sending cards can be used to control the LED display. Each of the sending cards can control a part of the display area of the LED display, so as to realize the control of the entire LED display.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供了一种屏幕区域控制方法、装置、发送卡及存储介质,可以提高屏幕控制效率的同时提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。本申请实施例的技术方案如下:Embodiments of the present application provide a screen area control method, device, sending card, and storage medium, which can improve screen control efficiency and convenience of screen area control. The technical scheme of the embodiment of the present application is as follows:
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种屏幕区域控制方法,应用于第一发送卡,所述第一发送卡包括路由模块、第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口,所述方法包括:In the first aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a screen area control method, which is applied to a first sending card, and the first sending card includes a routing module, a first routing network port, and a first sending card network port. The method include:
基于所述路由模块获取传输信息,获取所述传输信息的信息类型;Obtaining transmission information based on the routing module, and obtaining the information type of the transmission information;
若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则将所述回传信息经所述第一路由网口和所述第一发送卡网口传输至终端;If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then transmit the return information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port;
若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于所述区域控制信息,控制所述第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,所述区域控制信息是经所述第一发送卡网口从所述终端获取的。If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, the screen area corresponding to the first sending card is controlled to perform a display operation, and the area control information is transmitted through the first sending card. The card network port is obtained from the terminal.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种屏幕区域控制装置,所述屏幕区域控制装置包括路由模块、第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口,所述装置包括:In the second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a screen area control device, the screen area control device includes a routing module, a first routing network port and a first sending card network port, and the device includes:
类型获取单元,用于基于所述路由模块获取传输信息,获取所述传输信息的信息类型;a type obtaining unit, configured to obtain transmission information based on the routing module, and obtain the information type of the transmission information;
信息传输单元,用于若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则将所述回传信息经所述第一路由网口和所述第一发送卡网口传输至终端;An information transmission unit, configured to transmit the returned information to the terminal via the first routing network port and the first sending card network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information;
显示操作单元,用于若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于所述区域控制信息,控制所述第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,所述区域控制信息是经所述第一发送卡网口从所述终端获取的。A display operation unit, configured to control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, and the area control information is Obtained from the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
第三方面,一种屏幕区域控制方法,应用于发送卡,所述发送卡包括路由模块、第一路由网口和第二路由网口,所述方法包括:In a third aspect, a method for controlling a screen area is applied to a sending card, where the sending card includes a routing module, a first routing network port, and a second routing network port, and the method includes:
基于所述路由模块获取传输信息,获取所述传输信息的信息类型;Obtaining transmission information based on the routing module, and obtaining the information type of the transmission information;
若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则将所述回传信息经所述第二路由网口传输至终端,所述回传信息为经所述第一路由网口获取的;If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then transmit the return information to the terminal through the second routing network port, and the return information is obtained through the first routing network port ;
若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于所述区域控制信息,控制所述发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,所述区域控制信息为所述终端经所述第二路由网口传输至所述路由模块的。If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform display operations, and the area control information is that the terminal passes through the second The routing network port transmits to the routing module.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种屏幕区域控制装置,所述屏幕区域控制装置包括路由模块、第一路由网口和第二路由网口,所述装置包括:In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a screen area control device, the screen area control device includes a routing module, a first routing network port, and a second routing network port, and the device includes:
传输信息获取单元,用于基于所述路由模块获取传输信息,获取所述传输信息的信息类型;a transmission information obtaining unit, configured to obtain transmission information based on the routing module, and obtain the information type of the transmission information;
回传信息传输单元,用于若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则将所述回传信息经所述第二路由网口传输至终端,所述回传信息为经所述第一路由网口获取的;A return information transmission unit, configured to transmit the return information to the terminal through the second routing network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, and the return information is passed through the Obtained by the above-mentioned first routing network port;
区域控制单元,用于若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于所述区域控制信息,控制所述发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,所述区域控制信息为所述终端经所述第二路由网口传输至所述路由模块的。The area control unit is configured to control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, and the area control information is the area control information The terminal is transmitted to the routing module through the second routing network port.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供一种发送卡,可包括:处理器和存储器;其中,所述存储器存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序适于由所述处理器加载并执行上述的方法步骤。In the fifth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a sending card, which may include: a processor and a memory; wherein, the memory stores a computer program, and the computer program is adapted to be loaded by the processor and execute the above-mentioned method steps .
第六方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机存储介质,所述计算机存储介质存储有多条指令,所述指令适于由处理器加载并执行上述的方法步骤。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, where a plurality of instructions are stored in the computer storage medium, and the instructions are adapted to be loaded by a processor and execute the above-mentioned method steps.
本申请一些实施例提供的技术方案带来的有益效果至少包括:The beneficial effects brought by the technical solutions provided by some embodiments of the present application at least include:
在本申请一个或多个实施例中,通过基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型,若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口传输至终端,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,区域控制信息是经第一发送卡网口从终端获取的。因此第一发送卡基于路由模块获取传输信息时,可以采用网络传输方式进行信息传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高传输信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。In one or more embodiments of the present application, by obtaining the transmission information based on the routing module, the information type of the transmission information is obtained. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the return information is passed through the first routing network port and the second routing network port. 1. The network port of the sending card is transmitted to the terminal. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, the screen area corresponding to the first sending card is controlled to perform display operations. The area control information is transmitted through the network port of the first sending card. obtained from the terminal. Therefore, when the first sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, it can use the network transmission method for information transmission without using the serial port method to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information, reduce the screen control time, and increase the screen control speed. The first sending card is provided with a routing module, which can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
附图说明Description of drawings
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例或相关技术中的技术方案,下面将对实施例或相关技术描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,下面描述中的附图仅仅是本申请的一些实施例,对于本领域普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application or related technologies, the following will briefly introduce the accompanying drawings that need to be used in the description of the embodiments or related technologies. Obviously, the accompanying drawings in the following description are only For some embodiments of the application, those skilled in the art can also obtain other drawings based on these drawings without creative work.
图1示出本申请实施例的一种屏幕区域控制方法的背景示意图;FIG. 1 shows a schematic background diagram of a screen area control method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2示出本申请实施例的一种屏幕区域控制方法的背景示意图;FIG. 2 shows a schematic background diagram of a screen area control method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图;FIG. 3 shows a schematic flowchart of a screen area control method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4示出本申请实施例的一种显示屏幕的举例示意图;FIG. 4 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a display screen according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图;FIG. 5 shows a schematic flowchart of a screen area control method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6示出本申请实施例一种回传信息传输方法的举例示意图;FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图7示出本申请实施例一种区域控制信息传输方法的举例示意图;FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图;FIG. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9示出本申请实施例一种屏幕控制方法的系统架构图;FIG. 9 shows a system architecture diagram of a screen control method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图10示出本申请实施例一种回传信息传输方法的举例示意图;FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图11示出本申请实施例一种区域控制信息传输方法的举例示意图;Fig. 11 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application;
图12示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图;FIG. 12 shows a schematic flowchart of a screen area control method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13示出本申请实施例屏幕控制方法的系统架构图;FIG. 13 shows a system architecture diagram of a screen control method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图14示出本申请实施例一种回传信息传输方法的举例示意图;FIG. 14 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图15示出本申请实施例一种区域控制信息传输方法的举例示意图;FIG. 15 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application;
图16示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图;FIG. 16 shows a schematic flowchart of a screen area control method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图17示出本申请实施例一种回传信息传输方法的举例示意图;FIG. 17 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图18示出本申请实施例一种区域控制信息传输方法的举例示意图;FIG. 18 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a method for transmitting regional control information according to an embodiment of the present application;
图19示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图;FIG. 19 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图20示出本申请实施例一种回传信息传输方法的举例示意图;FIG. 20 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图21示出本申请实施例一种区域控制信息传输方法的举例示意图;FIG. 21 shows a schematic diagram of an example of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application;
图22示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制装置的结构示意图;Fig. 22 shows a schematic structural diagram of a screen area control device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图23示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制装置的结构示意图;Fig. 23 shows a schematic structural diagram of a screen area control device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图24示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制装置的结构示意图;Fig. 24 shows a schematic structural diagram of a screen area control device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图25示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制装置的结构示意图;Fig. 25 shows a schematic structural diagram of a screen area control device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图26示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图;Fig. 26 shows a schematic flowchart of a screen area control method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图27示出本申请实施例一种屏幕区域控制方法的背景示意图;FIG. 27 shows a schematic background diagram of a screen area control method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图28示出本申请实施例一种屏幕区域控制方法的系统架构图;FIG. 28 shows a system architecture diagram of a screen area control method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图29示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图;Fig. 29 shows a schematic flowchart of a screen area control method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图30示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制装置的结构示意图;Fig. 30 shows a schematic structural diagram of a screen area control device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图31示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制装置的结构示意图;Fig. 31 shows a schematic structural diagram of a screen area control device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图32本申请实施例提供的一种发送卡的结构示意图。Fig. 32 is a schematic structural diagram of a sending card provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述,显然,所描述的实施例仅仅是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。The following will clearly and completely describe the technical solutions in the embodiments of the application with reference to the drawings in the embodiments of the application. Apparently, the described embodiments are only some of the embodiments of the application, not all of them. Based on the embodiments in this application, all other embodiments obtained by persons of ordinary skill in the art without making creative efforts belong to the scope of protection of this application.
在本申请的描述中,需要理解的是,术语“第一”、“第二”等仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性。在本申请的描述中,需要说明的是,除非另有明确的规定和限定,“包括”和“具有”以及它们任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含。例如包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或设备没有限定于已列出的步骤或单元,而是可选地还包括没有列出的步骤或单元,或可选地还包括对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其他步骤或单元。对于本领域的普通技术人员而言,可以具体情况理解上述术语在本申请中的具体含义。此外,在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。In the description of the present application, it should be understood that the terms "first", "second" and so on are used for descriptive purposes only, and should not be understood as indicating or implying relative importance. In the description of the present application, it should be noted that, unless otherwise specified and limited, "including" and "having" and any variations thereof are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion. For example, a process, method, system, product or device comprising a series of steps or units is not limited to the listed steps or units, but optionally also includes unlisted steps or units, or optionally further includes For other steps or units inherent in these processes, methods, products or devices. Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand the specific meanings of the above terms in this application in specific situations. In addition, in the description of the present application, unless otherwise specified, "plurality" means two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B may indicate: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists independently. The character "/" generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or" relationship.
随着科学技术的发展,发光二极管应运而生,发光二极管是一种常用的发光器件,可以高效地将电能转化为光能。发光二极管可以应用于屏幕控制领域,例如可以使用LED灯组成LED显示屏,用来显示文字、图像、视频等各种信息。在LED显示屏显示信息时,可以使用多张发送卡组合控制该LED显示屏。其中每张发送卡可以控制LED显示屏的一部分显示区域,以便实现对整个LED显示屏的控制。例如外部应用端对LED显示屏进行控制时,可以采用发送卡级联的方式进行控制。该发送卡级联包括但不限于串口级联、网络级联,网络和串口结合级联等等。With the development of science and technology, light-emitting diodes have emerged as the times require. Light-emitting diodes are a commonly used light-emitting device that can efficiently convert electrical energy into light energy. Light-emitting diodes can be used in the field of screen control. For example, LED lights can be used to form an LED display to display various information such as text, images, and videos. When displaying information on the LED display, multiple sending cards can be used to control the LED display. Each of the sending cards can control a part of the display area of the LED display, so as to realize the control of the entire LED display. For example, when the external application side controls the LED display, it can be controlled by cascading sending cards. The sending card cascading includes but not limited to serial port cascading, network cascading, network and serial port combined cascading and so on.
可选的,图1示出本申请实施例的一种屏幕区域控制方法的背景示意图。如图1所示,多张发送卡采用网络级联。路由器分别与终端和每张发送卡的网口进行连接。当LED显示屏使用时没有路由器时,终端与发送卡的连接非常复杂,并且需要提前将发送卡的网络地址设置为固定网络地址,并且同一时刻只能使用一张发送卡,终端需要设置为同网段的网络地址才可以进行信息传输,因此屏幕控制步骤复杂,使得屏幕区域控制便利性较差。Optionally, FIG. 1 shows a schematic background diagram of a method for controlling a screen area according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 1, multiple sending cards are cascaded through the network. The router is respectively connected to the terminal and the network port of each sending card. When the LED display is used without a router, the connection between the terminal and the sending card is very complicated, and the network address of the sending card needs to be set to a fixed network address in advance, and only one sending card can be used at the same time, and the terminal needs to be set to the same Only the network address of the network segment can carry out information transmission, so the screen control steps are complicated, which makes the screen area control less convenient.
可选的,图2示出本申请实施例的一种屏幕区域控制方法的背景示意图。如图2所示,多张发送卡采用网络和串口级联,即发送卡1和发送卡2连接至路由器,发送卡3通过串口连接至发送卡1,发送卡4通过串口连接至发送卡2,即发送3的输入串口和发送卡1的输出串口连接,发送4的输入串口和发送卡2的输出串口连接。在进行信息传输时,需要对发送卡1和发送卡2分开设置网络地址,信息传输手级数数量限制。即底层发送卡与终端之间进行通信时需要所有发送卡进行中转。例如使用115200波特率进行信息传输时,1K数据传输到第一张发送卡需要71ms,传输至第n张则需要71*ms,其中n为正整数。因此在图2示出的场景中会出现串口传输速度较慢,屏幕控制步骤复杂,使得屏幕区域控制便利性较差的问题。Optionally, FIG. 2 shows a schematic background diagram of a method for controlling a screen area according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 2, multiple sending cards are cascaded through the network and serial port, that is, sending card 1 and sending card 2 are connected to the router, sending card 3 is connected to sending card 1 through the serial port, and sending card 4 is connected to sending card 2 through the serial port , that is, the input serial port of sending 3 is connected to the output serial port of sending card 1, and the input serial port of sending 4 is connected to the output serial port of sending card 2. When performing information transmission, it is necessary to separately set network addresses for sending card 1 and sending card 2, and the number of information transmission steps is limited. That is, all sending cards need to be transferred when communicating between the underlying sending card and the terminal. For example, when using 115200 baud rate for information transmission, it takes 71ms to transmit 1K data to the first sending card, and 71*ms to transmit to the nth card, where n is a positive integer. Therefore, in the scenario shown in FIG. 2 , the transmission speed of the serial port is relatively slow, and the screen control steps are complicated, which makes the screen area control less convenient.
下面结合具体的实施例对本申请进行详细说明。The present application will be described in detail below in conjunction with specific embodiments.
在一个实施例中,如图3所示,提出了一种屏幕区域控制方法,该方法可依赖于计算机程序实现,可运行于包括路由模块的发送卡上。该计算机程序可集成在应用中,也可作为独立的工具类应用运行。In one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3 , a screen area control method is proposed, which can be realized by relying on a computer program and can run on a sending card including a routing module. The computer program can be integrated in the application, or run as an independent utility application.
S101,基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型;S101. Obtain the transmission information based on the routing module, and obtain the information type of the transmission information;
根据一些实施例,本申请实施例的技术方案应用于第一发送卡,即本申请实施例的执行主体为第一发送卡。该第一发送卡并不特指某一固定发送卡。发送卡是指用于对信息进行处理并分发的集成板卡。一张发送卡通常可以控制至少一个屏幕区域。According to some embodiments, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are applied to the first sending card, that is, the executor of the embodiments of the present application is the first sending card. The first sending card does not specifically refer to a certain fixed sending card. Sending card refers to the integrated board used to process and distribute information. A sending card can usually control at least one screen area.
易于理解的是,第一发送卡包括路由模块、第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口。路由网口是指与路由模块相连接的网口,第一路由网口是指用于路由模块和第一发送卡连接的网口。发送卡网口是指发送卡本身设置的网口,且该发送卡网口并不直接与路由模块连接。第一发送卡网口是指第一发送卡本身设置网口,该第一发送卡网口并不特指某一固定网口,当第一发送卡发生变化时,该第一发送卡网口也会相应变化。It is easy to understand that the first sending card includes a routing module, a first routing network port and a first sending card network port. The routing network port refers to the network port connected to the routing module, and the first routing network port refers to the network port used to connect the routing module and the first sending card. The network port of the sending card refers to the network port set by the sending card itself, and the network port of the sending card is not directly connected to the routing module. The network port of the first sending card refers to the network port set on the first sending card itself. The network port of the first sending card does not refer to a fixed network port. When the first sending card changes, the network port of the first sending card will change accordingly.
可选的,路由模块是指模块化路由器。该路由模块的类型基于连接功能和管理功能决定的。例如,网口的类型发生变化时,该路由模块也会相应变化。Optionally, the routing module refers to a modular router. The type of the routing module is determined based on the connection function and the management function. For example, when the type of the network port changes, the routing module will also change accordingly.
根据一些实施例,第一发送卡中包括路由模块,在对第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行控制时,基于路由模块,第一发送卡可以获取到传输信息。当第一发送卡基于路由模块获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以获取该传输信息的信息类型。信息类型是指传输信息的信息传输方向属性,该信息类型并不特指某一固定信息类型。例如当传输信息发生变化时,该传输信息对应的信息类型也会相应变化。According to some embodiments, the first sending card includes a routing module, and when controlling the screen area corresponding to the first sending card, based on the routing module, the first sending card can acquire transmission information. When the first sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, the first sending card may obtain the information type of the transmission information. The information type refers to the attribute of the information transmission direction of the transmission information, and the information type does not specifically refer to a certain fixed information type. For example, when the transmission information changes, the information type corresponding to the transmission information will also change accordingly.
S102,若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口传输至终端;S102. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, transmit the return information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port;
根据一些实施例,回传信息是指第一发送卡获取到的且要传输至终端的信息。第一发送卡获取到的回传信息可以是直接基于用户的回传指令生成的,还可以是第二发送卡传输至第一发送卡的回传信息。According to some embodiments, the returned information refers to information obtained by the first sending card and to be transmitted to the terminal. The return information obtained by the first sending card may be generated directly based on the user's return instruction, and may also be the return information transmitted to the first sending card by the second sending card.
易于理解的是,基于路由模块,第一发送卡可以获取到传输信息。当第一发送卡获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以获取该传输信息的信息类型。若该信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息时,第一发送卡可以将回传信息经第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口传输至终端。It is easy to understand that, based on the routing module, the first sending card can obtain the transmission information. When the first sending card acquires the transmission information, the first sending card may acquire the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card may transmit the return information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port.
S103,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。S103. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation.
根据一些实施例,区域控制信息是指第一发送卡获取到的,且指示第一发送卡对第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作的信息。该区域控制信息是第一发送卡经第一发送卡网口从终端获取的。According to some embodiments, the area control information refers to information acquired by the first sending card and instructing the first sending card to perform a display operation on the screen area corresponding to the first sending card. The area control information is acquired by the first sending card from the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
易于理解的是,基于路由模块,第一发送卡可以获取到传输信息。当第一发送卡获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以获取该传输信息的信息类型。若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,第一发送卡可以控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。It is easy to understand that, based on the routing module, the first sending card can obtain the transmission information. When the first sending card acquires the transmission information, the first sending card may acquire the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then based on the area control information, the first sending card may control a screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation.
可选的,图4示出本申请实施例的一种显示屏幕的举例示意图。如图4所示,例如第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域为区域1和区域4。当第一发送卡获取到的区域控制信息为在区域1显示会议时间和在区域4显示会议主题。当第一发送卡获取到该区域控制信息时,第一发送卡可以在区域1显示会议时间和在区域4显示会议主题。Optionally, FIG. 4 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a display screen in the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4 , for example, the screen areas corresponding to the first sending card are area 1 and area 4 . When the area control information acquired by the first sending card is to display the meeting time in area 1 and the conference subject in area 4 . When the first sending card acquires the area control information, the first sending card can display the meeting time in area 1 and the meeting theme in area 4 .
在本申请一个或多个实施例中,通过基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型,若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口传输至终端,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,区域控制信息是经第一发送卡网口从终端获取的。因此第一发送卡基于路由模块获取传输信息时,可以采用网络传输方式进行信息传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高传输信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。In one or more embodiments of the present application, by obtaining the transmission information based on the routing module, the information type of the transmission information is obtained. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the return information is passed through the first routing network port and the second routing network port. 1. The network port of the sending card is transmitted to the terminal. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, the screen area corresponding to the first sending card is controlled to perform display operations. The area control information is transmitted through the network port of the first sending card. obtained from the terminal. Therefore, when the first sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, it can use the network transmission method for information transmission without using the serial port method to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information, reduce the screen control time, and increase the screen control speed. The first sending card is provided with a routing module, which can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
请参见图5,图5示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图。具体的:Please refer to FIG. 5 , which shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application. specific:
S201,获取第一发送卡的排序信息;S201. Obtain sorting information of the first sending card;
根据一些实施例,本申请实施例的技术方案可以用于LED显示屏的控制,或者其他采用发送卡级联控制的场景。本申请实施例的技术方案可以用于LED显示屏的屏幕分辨率较大的场景,屏幕分辨率是指纵横向上的像素点数。例如本申请实施例的技术方案可以用于屏幕分辨率为1600*1200的场景。According to some embodiments, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be used for the control of LED display screens, or other scenarios where sending card cascade control is used. The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be used in scenes where the screen resolution of the LED display screen is relatively large, and the screen resolution refers to the number of pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. For example, the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application may be used in a scene with a screen resolution of 1600*1200.
易于理解的是,本申请实施例的技术方案应用于发送卡集合中的第一发送卡,即本申请实施例的执行 主体为发送卡集合中的第一发送卡。该第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的任一发送卡,即该第一发送卡并不特指某一固定发送卡。集合是指具有某种特定性质的具体的或抽象的对象汇总而成的集体。发送卡集合是指由至少一张发送卡汇总而成的集合。It is easy to understand that the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is applied to the first sending card in the sending card set, that is, the execution subject of the embodiment of the present application is the first sending card in the sending card set. The first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set, that is, the first sending card does not specifically refer to a certain fixed sending card. A collection is a collection of concrete or abstract objects with certain properties. The sending card set refers to the set formed by at least one sending card.
根据一些实施例,发送卡集合中包括至少一张第一发送卡。当第一发送卡基于路由模块获取传输信息之前,第一发送卡可以获取第一发送卡的排序信息。该排序信息用于指示第一发送卡在发送卡集合中的排序。由于不同的发送卡接收到区域控制信息或者回传信息时的执行步骤存在区别,因此获取第一发送卡的排序信息可以提高屏幕区域控制的准确性,提高屏幕控制的便利性。According to some embodiments, the sending card set includes at least one first sending card. Before the first sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, the first sending card may obtain the sorting information of the first sending card. The sorting information is used to indicate the sorting of the first sending card in the sending card set. Since different sending cards have different execution steps when receiving the area control information or returning the information, obtaining the sorting information of the first sending card can improve the accuracy of screen area control and the convenience of screen control.
可选的,发送卡集合中至少一张第一发送卡的排序可以是基于第一发送卡与终端的距离确定的,即与终端连接最近的即为第一张发送卡,与终端连接最远的即为最后一张发送卡。其中第一张发送卡与终端之间可以是直接连接,还可以是通过外部路由器连接。例如,图2示出的背景示意图中,发送卡1的排序信息为第一,发送卡3的排序信息为第二。Optionally, the ordering of at least one first sending card in the sending card set may be determined based on the distance between the first sending card and the terminal, that is, the one closest to the terminal is the first sending card, and the farthest connected to the terminal is the last sending card. The first sending card and the terminal can be directly connected, or connected through an external router. For example, in the background diagram shown in FIG. 2 , the sorting information of sending card 1 is first, and the sorting information of sending card 3 is second.
易于理解的是,排序信息并不特指某一固定信息。该排序信息与发送卡集合包括的第一发送卡的数量确定的。当发送卡集合中第一发送卡的数量发生变化时,该第一发送卡的排序信息也会相应变化。It is easy to understand that sorting information does not specifically refer to certain fixed information. The sorting information is determined by the number of first sending cards included in the sending card set. When the number of the first sending card in the sending card set changes, the sorting information of the first sending card will also change accordingly.
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作之前,第一发送卡可以获取第一发送卡的排序信息。第一发送卡获取到的排序信息例如可以是排序为第一的发送卡,还可以是排序为最后一张的发送卡。According to some embodiments, before the first sending card controls the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation, the first sending card may acquire the sorting information of the first sending card. The sorting information obtained by the first sending card may be, for example, the sending card ranked first, or the sending card ranked last.
S202,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中最后一张发送卡之前的任一发送卡,则控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址;S202, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, then control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and then configure the first network address through the second routing network port Configure the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card;
根据一些实施例,第二发送卡为发送卡集合中与第一发送卡相邻的下一张发送卡,即第二发送卡是指发送卡集合中与第一发送卡相邻的且远离终端的下一张发送卡。该第二发送卡并不特指某一固定发送卡。例如当第一发送卡发生变化时,该第二发送卡也会相应变化。第二发送卡网口为第二发送卡上本身设置的网口,该第二发送卡网口不与第二发送卡的路由模块直接连接。According to some embodiments, the second sending card is the next sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, that is, the second sending card refers to the sending card in the sending card set that is adjacent to the first sending card and is far away from the terminal next sending card. The second sending card does not specifically refer to a certain fixed sending card. For example, when the first sending card changes, the second sending card will also change accordingly. The network port of the second sending card is a network port provided on the second sending card itself, and the network port of the second sending card is not directly connected to the routing module of the second sending card.
易于理解的是,第二发送卡为发送卡集合中与第一发送卡相邻的下一张发送卡,且第一发送卡的第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口连接。因此,发送卡集合中的第一发送卡确定之后,可以将与第一发送卡的第二路由网口连接的第二发送卡网口对应的发送卡确定为第二发送卡。It is easy to understand that the second sending card is the next sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, and the second routing network port of the first sending card is connected to the network port of the second sending card. Therefore, after the first sending card in the sending card set is determined, the sending card corresponding to the second sending card network port connected to the second routing network port of the first sending card may be determined as the second sending card.
可选的,网络地址(Network address)是指网口具有的逻辑地址,其中一个网口对应一个网络地址。一个网口的网络地址并不特指某一固定网络地址。该网络地址可以基于接收到的网络地址修改指令进行修改。第一网络地址是指第一发送卡控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置的网口的地址。第二网络地址是指在第一发送卡为发送卡集合中最后一张发送卡之前的任一发送卡时,第一发送卡控制路由模块经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置的地址。由于第一发送卡可以获取地址修改指令,因此第一网络地址和第二网络地址并不特指某一固定地址。Optionally, the network address (Network address) refers to the logical address of the network port, where one network port corresponds to one network address. The network address of a network port does not specifically refer to a fixed network address. The network address may be modified based on the received network address modification instruction. The first network address refers to the address of the network port configured by the first sending card to control the routing module to the first routing network port. The second network address refers to when the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, the first sending card controls the routing module to the second sending card of the second sending card through the second routing network port. The address configured by the network port of the sending card. Since the first sending card can obtain the address modification instruction, the first network address and the second network address do not specifically refer to a certain fixed address.
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡获取到第一发送卡的排序信息时,第一发送卡可以判断该排序信息是否指示该第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡。当第一发送卡确定排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中最后一张发送卡之前的任一发送卡,即排序信息指示第一发送卡不为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡时,第一发送卡可以控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址。其中,第一发送卡的第二路由网口未配置网络地址。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card acquires the sorting information of the first sending card, the first sending card may determine whether the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set. When the first sending card determines that the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, that is, the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is not the last sending card in the sending card set , the first sending card can control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and configure the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card through the second routing network port. Wherein, the second routing network port of the first sending card is not configured with a network address.
易于理解的是,发送卡集合中排序信息从第一张到最后一张的发送卡例如可以是Q发送卡、W发送卡、E发送卡、R发送卡和T发送卡。第一发送卡例如可以是W发送卡,第二发送卡例如可以是E发送卡。W发送卡包括w路由模块、第一路由网口w1路由网口、第二路由网口w2路由网口、第一发送卡网口w3发送卡网口,E发送卡包括第二发送卡网口e3发送卡网口,e3发送卡网口和w2路由网口连接。当第一发送卡W发送卡基于获取到的排序信息确定W发送卡为第二张发送卡时,W发送卡可以控制w路由模块给w1路由网口配置第一网络地址。该第一网络地址例如可以是互联网协议(Internet Protocol,IP)地址,该第一网络地址例如可以是123.12.123.12。W发送卡经第二路由网口w2路由网口向第二发送卡E发送卡的第二发送卡网口e3发送卡网口配置第二网络地址。该第二网络地址例如可以是IP地址,该第二网 络地址例如可以是123.12.123.13。It is easy to understand that the sending cards whose information is sorted from the first to the last in the sending card set may be, for example, a Q sending card, a W sending card, an E sending card, an R sending card, and a T sending card. The first sending card may be, for example, a W sending card, and the second sending card may be, for example, an E sending card. W sending card includes w routing module, first routing network port w1 routing network port, second routing network port w2 routing network port, first sending card network port w3 sending card network port, E sending card includes second sending card network port The e3 sending card network port is connected to the w2 routing network port. When the first sending card W sending card determines that the W sending card is the second sending card based on the obtained sorting information, the W sending card can control the w routing module to configure the first network address for the w1 routing network port. The first network address may be, for example, an Internet Protocol (Internet Protocol, IP) address, and the first network address may be, for example, 123.12.123.12. The W sending card configures the second network address to the second sending card network port e3 of the sending card network port of the second sending card E via the second routing network port w2. The second network address may be, for example, an IP address, and the second network address may be, for example, 123.12.123.13.
S203,基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型;S203, acquire the transmission information based on the routing module, and acquire the information type of the transmission information;
具体过程如上所述,此处不再赘述。The specific process is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡基于路由模块获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以基于传输信息的获取网口获取传输信息的信息类型。例如当路由模块通过第一发送卡的第二路由网口、路由模块和第一路由网口获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以确定该传输信息的信息类型为回传信息类型。当路由模块通过第一发送卡网口获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以确定该传输信息的信息类型为区域控制信息类型。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, the first sending card may obtain the information type of the transmission information based on the network port for obtaining the transmission information. For example, when the routing module obtains the transmission information through the second routing network port of the first sending card, the routing module and the first routing network port, the first sending card may determine that the information type of the transmission information is the return information type. When the routing module obtains the transmission information through the network port of the first sending card, the first sending card may determine that the information type of the transmission information is the area control information type.
具体的,第一发送卡基于路由模块获取传输信息,可以是若第一发送卡获取到的排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中最后一张发送卡之前的任一发送卡,即排序信息指示第一发送卡不为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡,且控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址之后,第一发送卡可以获取传输信息。Specifically, the first sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module. If the sorting information obtained by the first sending card indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, that is, sorting The information indicates that the first sending card is not the last sending card in the sending card set, and the routing module is controlled to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and send the second network address to the second sending card through the second routing network port. After the network port of the sending card is configured with the second network address, the first sending card can obtain the transmission information.
S204,若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则经第一路由网口获取回传信息;S204. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, obtain the return information through the first routing network port;
根据一些实施例,当排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中最后一张发送卡之前的任一发送卡,即排序信息指示第一发送卡不为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡时,第一发送卡可以经第一路由网口获取回传信息。该回传信息为第二发送卡经第二发送卡网口、第一发送卡的第二路由网口传输至路由模块的信息。According to some embodiments, when the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, that is, the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is not the last sending card in the sending card set , the first sending card can obtain the return information through the first routing network port. The return information is the information transmitted by the second sending card to the routing module through the network port of the second sending card and the second routing network port of the first sending card.
易于理解的是,当第一发送卡获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以获取传输信息的信息类型。若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息时,则第一发送卡可以经第一路由网口获取该回传信息。具体的,第一发送卡可以基于第一网络地址获取该回传信息。例如W发送卡可以基于第一网络地址123.12.123.12获取该回传信息。It is easy to understand that when the first sending card acquires the transmission information, the first sending card can acquire the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card may obtain the return information through the first routing network port. Specifically, the first sending card may acquire the returned information based on the first network address. For example, the W sending card may acquire the return information based on the first network address 123.12.123.12.
S205,经第一发送卡网口将回传信息传输至终端;S205, transmit the returned information to the terminal through the network port of the first sending card;
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以获取第一传输信息的信息类型。若该信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则第一发送卡经第一路由网口获取该回传信息。当第一发送卡经第一路由网口获取到回传信息时,第一发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口将回传信息传输至终端。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card acquires the transmission information, the first sending card may acquire the information type of the first transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card obtains the return information through the first routing network port. When the first sending card obtains the returned information through the first routing network port, the first sending card may transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first sending card network port.
易于理解的是,图6示出本申请实施例一种回传信息传输方法的举例示意图。例如W发送卡的路由模块获取到E发送卡经W发送卡的第二路由网口w2路由网口和E发送卡的e3发送卡网口传输的回传信息时,W发送卡可以通过第一路由网口w1路由网口从路由模块中获取到该回传信息。当W发送卡获取到回传信息时,W发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口w3发送卡网口将回传信息传输至终端。It is easy to understand that FIG. 6 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application. For example, when the routing module of the W sending card obtains the return information transmitted by the E sending card through the second routing network port w2 of the W sending card and the e3 sending card network port of the E sending card, the W sending card can pass the first The routing network port w1 obtains the returned information from the routing module. When the W sending card obtains the returned information, the W sending card may transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first sending card network port w3 sending card network port.
可选的,第一发送卡还可以直接获取到回传信息,即该回传信息是由第一发送卡生成的,并非第二发送卡传输的。当第一发送卡生成回传信息时,第一发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口将生成的回传信息传输至终端。例如,当W发送卡接收到用户的回传指令时,W发送卡可以生成回传信息。当W发送卡获取到回传信息时,W发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口w3发送卡网口将回传信息传输至终端。Optionally, the first sending card may also directly obtain the returned information, that is, the returned information is generated by the first sending card, not transmitted by the second sending card. When the first sending card generates the return information, the first sending card may transmit the generated return information to the terminal through the network port of the first sending card. For example, when the W sending card receives the return instruction from the user, the W sending card can generate the return information. When the W sending card obtains the returned information, the W sending card may transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first sending card network port w3 sending card network port.
S206,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中最后一张发送卡之前的任一发送卡,且信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则将区域控制信息经第一路由网口、路由模块、第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口传输至第二发送卡;S206, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then transmit the area control information through the first routing network port, The routing module, the second routing network port and the second sending card network port are transmitted to the second sending card;
根据一些实施例,当排序信息指示第一发送卡发送卡集合中最后一张发送卡之前的任一发送卡时,第一发送卡可以获取传输信息的信息类型。该区域控制信息是第一发送卡通过第一发送卡网口获取到的。若第一发送卡确定传输信息的信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息时,则第一发送卡可以将区域控制信息经第一路由网口、路由模块、第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口传输至第二发送卡。According to some embodiments, when the sorting information indicates any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set of the first sending card, the first sending card may acquire the information type of the transmission information. The area control information is obtained by the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card. If the first sending card determines that the information type of the transmission information indicates that the transmission information is regional control information, then the first sending card can send the regional control information through the first routing network port, the routing module, the second routing network port and the second sending card. The network port transmits to the second sending card.
易于理解的是,图7示出本申请实施例一种区域控制信息传输方法的举例示意图。例如W发送卡获取到Q发送卡经Q发送卡的第二路由网口q2路由网口和w3发送卡网口传输的区域控制信息时,W发送卡可以将该区域信息经第一路由网口w1路由网口传输至w路由模块。W发送卡可以控制w路由模块将该区域控制信息经第二路由网口w2路由网口传输至第二发送卡E发送卡。具体可以是,W发送卡可以控制w路由模块将该区域控制信息经第二路由网口w2路由网口、第二发送卡E发送卡的e3发送卡网口传输至第二发送卡E发送卡。It is easy to understand that FIG. 7 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application. For example, when the W sending card obtains the area control information transmitted by the Q sending card through the second routing network port q2 routing network port of the Q sending card and the w3 sending card network port, the W sending card can pass the area information through the first routing network port The w1 routing network port transmits to the w routing module. The W sending card can control the w routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card E sending card through the second routing network port w2 routing network port. Specifically, the W sending card can control the w routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card E sending card through the second routing network port w2 routing network port and the e3 sending card network port of the second sending card E sending card .
S207,基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。S207. Based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation.
具体过程如上所述,此处不再赘述。The specific process is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
根据一些实施例,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作时,第一发送卡可以解析区域控制信息,获取区域控制信息中的识别码集合。若识别码集合中包括第一发送卡的识别码,则第一发送卡可以基于区域控制信息控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。本申请实施例的技术方案可以采用单指令对屏幕区域进行控制,可以提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。According to some embodiments, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, when controlling the screen area corresponding to the first sending card for display operation, the first sending card can analyze the area control information and obtain the area control information The collection of identifiers in . If the identification code set includes the identification code of the first sending card, the first sending card may control the corresponding screen area of the first sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information. The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can use a single command to control the screen area, which can improve the convenience of screen area control.
易于理解的是,该识别码用于唯一表示发送卡。该识别码集合为至少一个识别码汇总而成的集体。该识别码集合中可以包括组合码或者单个发送卡的识别码。其中一个发送卡的识别码可以属于不同的组合码。例如Q发送卡的识别码为1、W发送卡的识别码为2、E发送卡的识别码为3、R发送卡的识别码为4和T发送卡的识别码为5。该识别码集合例如可以是12345,该识别码集合例如还可以是12、45,该识别码集合例如还可以是1、2、3。It is easy to understand that the identification code is used to uniquely represent the sending card. The set of identification codes is a collection of at least one identification code. The set of identification codes may include combination codes or identification codes of a single sending card. The identification codes of one of the sending cards may belong to different combination codes. For example, the identification code of the Q sending card is 1, the identification code of the W sending card is 2, the identification code of the E sending card is 3, the identification code of the R sending card is 4, and the identification code of the T sending card is 5. The identification code set may be 12345, for example, the identification code set may be 12, 45, and the identification code set may be 1, 2, 3, for example.
可选的,Q发送卡获取到传输信息,且确定该传输信息为区域控制信息时,第一发送卡可以解析该区域控制信息,并获取该区域控制信息中的识别码集合。Q发送卡获取到的识别码集合例如可以是12345。当Q发送卡确定该识别码集合中包括Q发送卡的识别码1时,则Q发送卡可以基于区域控制信息控制Q发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。Optionally, when the Q sending card obtains the transmission information and determines that the transmission information is area control information, the first sending card may parse the area control information and obtain the set of identification codes in the area control information. The set of identification codes acquired by the Q sending card may be 12345, for example. When the Q sending card determines that the set of identification codes includes the identification code 1 of the Q sending card, the Q sending card can control the corresponding screen area of the Q sending card to perform display operations based on the area control information.
在本申请一个或多个实施例中,获取第一发送卡的排序信息,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中最后一张发送卡之前的任一发送卡,则控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址,可以减少网络地址的配置步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的效率。其次,基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型,若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则经第一路由网口获取回传信息,并经第一发送卡网口将回传信息传输至终端,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中最后一张发送卡之前的任一发送卡,且信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则将区域控制信息经第一路由网口、路由模块、第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口传输至第二发送卡,因此第一发送卡基于路由模块获取传输信息时,可以采用网络传输方式进行信息传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高传输信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。In one or more embodiments of the present application, the sorting information of the first sending card is obtained, and if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, the routing module is controlled to Configure the first network address on the first routing network port, and configure the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card through the second routing network port, which can reduce the configuration steps of the network address and improve the efficiency of screen area control . Secondly, the transmission information is obtained based on the routing module, and the information type of the transmission information is obtained. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the return information is obtained through the first routing network port, and the return information is transmitted through the first sending card network port. The information is transmitted to the terminal. If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the area control information will be sent through the first routing The network port, the routing module, the second routing network port and the second sending card network port are transmitted to the second sending card, so when the first sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, it can use the network transmission method for information transmission without using the serial port The way to obtain transmission information can increase the transmission speed of transmission information, reduce the time of screen control, and increase the speed of screen control. At the same time, because the first sending card is equipped with a routing module, it can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and increase the screen area. Convenience of control.
请参见图8,图8示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图。具体的:Please refer to FIG. 8 , which shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application. specific:
S301,获取第一发送卡的排序信息;S301. Obtain sorting information of the first sending card;
具体过程如上所述,此处不再赘述。The specific process is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
S302,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则经第一发送卡网口获取外部路由器向第一发送卡网口配置的第三网络地址;S302. If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, obtain the third network address configured by the external router to the network port of the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card;
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡获取到第一发送卡的排序信息时,第一发送卡可以判断排序信息是否指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡。第一发送卡获取到排序信息例如可以是该发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card acquires the sorting information of the first sending card, the first sending card may determine whether the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set. The sorting information obtained by the first sending card may be, for example, that the sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set.
易于理解的是,图9示出本申请实施例一种屏幕控制方法的系统架构图。如图9所示,本申请实施例的执行主体为第一发送卡,该第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,该第一发送卡经第一发送卡网口连接至外部路由器,外部路由器与终端连接。其中,第一发送卡可以通过网线经第一发送卡网口连接至外部路由器。外部路由器可以通过网线与终端连接。It is easy to understand that FIG. 9 shows a system architecture diagram of a screen control method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 9, the executive subject of the embodiment of the present application is the first sending card, which is the first sending card in the sending card set, and the first sending card is connected to the The external router is connected with the terminal. Wherein, the first sending card can be connected to the external router through the network port of the first sending card through a network cable. The external router can be connected to the terminal through a network cable.
可选的,若第一发送卡获取到的排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,且该第一发送卡经第一发送卡网口连接至外部路由器,则外部路由器可以向第一路由网口配置第三网络地址。若第一发送卡检测到外部路由器向第一发送卡网口配置第三网络地址时,第一发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口获取外部路由器向第一发送卡网口配置的第三网络地址。Optionally, if the sorting information obtained by the first sending card indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, and the first sending card is connected to the external router through the network port of the first sending card, then The external router can configure the third network address to the first routing network port. If the first sending card detects that the external router configures the third network address to the first sending card network port, the first sending card can obtain the third network address configured by the external router to the first sending card network port through the first sending card network port. address.
根据一些实施例,第三网络地址是指在第一发送卡的第一发送卡网口连接至外部路由器时,外部路由器向第一发送卡网口配置的网络地址。该第三网络地址并不特指某一固定网络地址。例如当外部路由器接收到针对第三网络地址的地址修改指令时,外部路由器可以基于该地址修改指令修改该第三网络地址。According to some embodiments, the third network address refers to the network address configured by the external router to the network port of the first sending card when the first sending card network port of the first sending card is connected to the external router. The third network address does not specifically refer to a certain fixed network address. For example, when the external router receives an address modification instruction for the third network address, the external router may modify the third network address based on the address modification instruction.
易于理解的是,如图9所示,第一发送卡例如可以是Q发送卡,第二发送卡例如可以是W发送卡。Q发送卡的q1发送卡网口与外部路由器P路由器连接,Q发送卡的第二路由网口q2路由网口与W发送卡的w3发送卡网口连接。外部路由器配置Q发送卡的q1发送卡网口的网络地址,即Q发送卡可以经q1发送卡获取外部路由器给q1发送卡网口配置的第三网络地址。该第三网络地址例如可以是123.89.76.678。It is easy to understand that, as shown in FIG. 9 , the first sending card may be, for example, a Q sending card, and the second sending card may be, for example, a W sending card. The q1 sending card network port of the Q sending card is connected to the external router P router, and the second routing network port q2 routing network port of the Q sending card is connected to the w3 sending card network port of the W sending card. The external router configures the network address of the q1 sending card network port of the Q sending card, that is, the Q sending card can obtain the third network address configured by the external router for the q1 sending card network port through the q1 sending card. The third network address may be 123.89.76.678, for example.
S303,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址;S303, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, then control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and send the first network address to the second sending card through the second routing network port Configure the second network address for the network port of the second sending card;
根据一些实施例,第一发送卡的第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口连接,第二发送卡为发送卡集合中与第一发送卡相邻的下一张发送卡,第二发送卡网口是第二发送卡本身设置的网口。该第二发送卡网口并不特指某一固定发送卡网口。例如当第二发送卡发生变化时,该第二发送卡网口也会相应变化。According to some embodiments, the second routing network port of the first sending card is connected to the network port of the second sending card, the second sending card is the next sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, and the second sending card The network port of the card is the network port set by the second sending card itself. The second sending card network port does not specifically refer to a fixed sending card network port. For example, when the second sending card changes, the network port of the second sending card will also change accordingly.
易于理解的是,第一发送卡获取到第一发送卡的排序信息时,第一发送卡可以判断该排序信息是否指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡。若第一发送卡确定该排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则第一发送卡可以控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址。It is easy to understand that, when the first sending card obtains the sorting information of the first sending card, the first sending card can determine whether the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set. If the first sending card determines that the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, then the first sending card can control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and through the first sending card The second routing network port configures the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card.
易于理解的是,发送卡集合中排序信息从第一张到最后一张的发送卡例如可以是Q发送卡、W发送卡、E发送卡、R发送卡和T发送卡。第一发送卡例如可以是Q发送卡。Q发送卡包括q路由模块、第一路由网口q1路由网口、第二路由网口q2路由网口、第一发送卡网口q3发送卡网口,W发送卡包括第二发送卡网口w3发送卡网口,w3发送卡网口和w2路由网口连接。当Q发送卡基于获取到的Q发送卡的排序信息确定Q发送卡为第一张发送卡时,Q发送卡可以控制q路由模块给q1路由网口配置第一网络地址。该第一网络地址例如可以是IP地址,该第一地址例如可以是123.12.123.12。Q发送卡经第二路由网口q2路由网口向第二发送卡W发送卡的第二发送卡网口w3发送卡网口配置第二网络地址。该第二网络地址例如可以是IP地址,该第二地址例如可以是123.12.123.13。It is easy to understand that the sending cards whose information is sorted from the first to the last in the sending card set may be, for example, a Q sending card, a W sending card, an E sending card, an R sending card, and a T sending card. The first sending card may be, for example, a Q sending card. Q sending card includes q routing module, first routing network port q1 routing network port, second routing network port q2 routing network port, first sending card network port q3 sending card network port, W sending card includes second sending card network port The w3 sending card network port is connected to the w2 routing network port. When the Q sending card determines that the Q sending card is the first sending card based on the obtained sorting information of the Q sending card, the Q sending card can control the q routing module to configure the first network address for the q1 routing network port. The first network address may be, for example, an IP address, and the first address may be, for example, 123.12.123.12. The Q sending card configures the second network address to the second sending card network port w3 of the sending card network port of the second sending card W via the second routing network port q2. The second network address may be, for example, an IP address, and the second address may be, for example, 123.12.123.13.
S304,基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型;S304, acquire the transmission information based on the routing module, and acquire the information type of the transmission information;
具体过程如上所述,此处不再赘述。The specific process is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
S305,若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则经第一路由网口获取回传信息;S305. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, obtain the return information through the first routing network port;
根据一些实施例,当排序信息指示第一发送卡是发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡时,第一发送卡可以经第一路由网口获取回传信息。该回传信息为第二发送卡经第二发送卡网口、第一发送卡的第二路由网口传输至路由模块的信息。According to some embodiments, when the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, the first sending card may obtain the return information through the first routing network port. The return information is the information transmitted by the second sending card to the routing module through the network port of the second sending card and the second routing network port of the first sending card.
易于理解的是,当第一发送卡获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以获取传输信息的信息类型。若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则第一发送卡可以经第一路由网口获取该回传信息。具体的,第一发送卡可以基于第一网络地址获取该回传信息。例如Q发送卡可以基于第一网络地址123.12.123.12获取W发送卡传输该回传信息。It is easy to understand that when the first sending card acquires the transmission information, the first sending card can acquire the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card may obtain the return information through the first routing network port. Specifically, the first sending card may acquire the returned information based on the first network address. For example, the Q sending card can obtain the W sending card to transmit the return information based on the first network address 123.12.123.12.
S306,经第一发送卡网口将回传信息传输至外部路由器,回传信息用于指示外部路由器将回传信息传输至终端;S306. Transmit the return information to the external router through the network port of the first sending card, where the return information is used to instruct the external router to transmit the return information to the terminal;
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以获取第一传输信息的信息类型。若该信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则第一发送卡经第一路由网口获取该回传信息。当第一发送卡经第一路由网口获取到回传信息时,第一发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口将回传信息传输至外部路由器。当外部路由器获取到第一发送卡经第一发送卡网口传输的回传信息时,外部路由器可以将该回传信息传输至终端。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card acquires the transmission information, the first sending card may acquire the information type of the first transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card obtains the return information through the first routing network port. When the first sending card obtains the backhaul information through the first routing network port, the first sending card may transmit the backhaul information to the external router through the first sending card network port. When the external router acquires the return information transmitted by the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card, the external router may transmit the return information to the terminal.
易于理解的是,图10示出本申请实施例一种回传信息传输方法的举例示意图。例如Q发送卡的q路由模块获取到W发送卡经W发送卡的第二发送卡网口w3发送卡网口传输的回传信息时,Q发送卡可以通过q1路由网口从路由模块q路由模块中获取到该回传信息。当Q发送卡获取到回传信息时,Q发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口q3发送卡网口将回传信息传输至外部路由器。当外部路由器获取到第一发送卡经第一发送卡网口传输的回传信息时,外部路由器可以将该回传信息传输至M终端。It is easy to understand that FIG. 10 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application. For example, when the q routing module of the Q sending card obtains the return information transmitted by the W sending card through the second sending card network port w3 of the W sending card, the Q sending card can route from the routing module q through the q1 routing network port. The returned information is obtained in the module. When the Q sending card obtains the return information, the Q sending card can transmit the return information to the external router through the first sending card network port q3 sending card network port. When the external router acquires the return information transmitted by the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card, the external router may transmit the return information to the M terminal.
易于理解的是,本申请实施例可以采用网络传输方式进行回传信息的传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高回传信息的传输速度,减少回传信息的传输时间,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块, 可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。It is easy to understand that the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method to transmit the return information, without using the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the return information and reduce the transmission time of the return information. At the same time, due to the first The sending card is equipped with a routing module, which can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以获取该传输信息的信息类型。若该信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则第一发送卡可以经第一路由网口获取该回传信息。当第一发送卡经第一路由网口获取到回传信息时,第一发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口将回传信息传输至外部路由器。具体地,第二发送卡可以基于第二发送卡网口的第二网络地址和第一发送卡的第二路由网口将回传信息传输至第一发送卡的路由模块。第一发送卡可以基于第一网络地址获取路由模块中的回传信息。当第一发送卡获取到回传信息时,第一发送卡可以基于第一发送卡网口的第三网络地址将回传信息发送至外部路由器。外部路由器可以在获取到回传信息之前给终端的网口配置第五网络地址,因此外部路由器在获取到回传信息时,外部路由器可以基于该第五网络地址将回传信息传输至终端。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card obtains the transmission information, the first sending card may obtain the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card may obtain the return information through the first routing network port. When the first sending card obtains the backhaul information through the first routing network port, the first sending card may transmit the backhaul information to the external router through the first sending card network port. Specifically, the second sending card may transmit the return information to the routing module of the first sending card based on the second network address of the network port of the second sending card and the second routing network port of the first sending card. The first sending card may acquire the return information in the routing module based on the first network address. When the first sending card obtains the return information, the first sending card may send the return information to the external router based on the third network address of the network port of the first sending card. The external router can configure a fifth network address for the network port of the terminal before obtaining the returned information, so when the external router obtains the returned information, the external router can transmit the returned information to the terminal based on the fifth network address.
可选的,Q发送卡可以基于w3发送卡网口的第二网络地址123.12.123.13和Q发送卡的第二路由网口q2路由网口将回传信息传输至Q发送卡的q路由模块。Q发送卡可以基于q1路由网口的第一网络地址123.12.123.12获取路由模块中的回传信息。当Q发送卡获取到回传信息时,Q发送卡可以基于第一发送卡网口q3发送卡网口的第三网络地址123.89.76.678将回传信息传输至外部路由器。外部路由器可以在获取到回传信息之前给终端的网口配置第五网络地址,该第五网络地址例如可以是45.15.126.125,因此外部路由器在获取到回传信息时,外部路由器可以基于该第五网络地址45.15.126.125将回传信息传输至M终端。Optionally, the Q sending card may transmit the return information to the q routing module of the Q sending card based on the second network address 123.12.123.13 of the w3 sending card network port and the q2 routing network port of the Q sending card's second routing network port. The Q sending card can obtain the return information in the routing module based on the first network address 123.12.123.12 of the routing network port of q1. When the Q sending card obtains the return information, the Q sending card may transmit the return information to the external router based on the third network address 123.89.76.678 of the first sending card network port q3 sending card network port. The external router can configure a fifth network address for the network port of the terminal before obtaining the returned information, and the fifth network address can be 45.15. 5. The network address 45.15.126.125 transmits the return information to the M terminal.
S307,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块;S307, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then transmit the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port;
根据一些实施例,当排序信息指示第一发送卡是发送卡集合中的第一发送卡时,第一发送卡可以获取传输信息的信息类型。该区域控制信息是第一发送卡通过第一发送卡网口获取到的,该区域控制信息为终端经外部路由器和第一发送卡网口传输至第一发送卡的。若第一发送卡确定传输信息的信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息时,则第一发送卡可以经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块。According to some embodiments, when the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, the first sending card may acquire the information type of the transmission information. The area control information is obtained by the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card, and the area control information is transmitted by the terminal to the first sending card through the external router and the network port of the first sending card. If the first sending card determines that the information type of the transmission information indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the first sending card may transmit the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port.
易于理解的是,图11示出本申请实施例一种区域控制信息传输方法的举例示意图。例如Q发送卡通过q3发送卡网口获取到外部路由器发送的区域控制信息时,Q发送卡可以将该区域信息经第一路由网口q1路由网口传输至q路由模块。It is easy to understand that FIG. 11 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application. For example, when the Q sending card obtains the area control information sent by the external router through the q3 sending card network port, the Q sending card can transmit the area information to the q routing module through the first routing network port q1 routing network port.
根据一些实施例,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块时,第一发送卡可以基于第一发送卡网口的第三网络地址获取外部路由器发送的区域控制信息。当第一发送卡获取到区域控制信息时,第一发送卡可以基于第一网络地址将该区域控制信息发送至路由模块。According to some embodiments, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, when the area control information is transmitted to the routing module through the first routing network port, the first sending card may be based on the third network address of the first sending card network port Obtain the zone control information sent by the external router. When the first sending card acquires the area control information, the first sending card may send the area control information to the routing module based on the first network address.
易于理解的是,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则Q发送卡经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块时,Q发送卡可以基于第一发送卡网口w3发送卡网口的第三网络地址123.89.76.678获取外部路由器发送的区域控制信息。当Q发送卡获取到区域控制信息时,Q发送卡可以基于第一网络地址123.12.123.12将该区域控制信息发送至q路由模块。It is easy to understand that if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, when the Q sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port, the Q sending card can send the card based on the first sending card network port w3 The third network address 123.89.76.678 of the network port obtains the area control information sent by the external router. When the Q sending card acquires the area control information, the Q sending card may send the area control information to the q routing module based on the first network address 123.12.123.12.
S308,控制路由模块经第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口将区域控制信息传输至第二发送卡;S308, controlling the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port;
根据一些实施例,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则第一发送卡经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块。当第一发送卡将区域控制信息传输至路由模块时,第一发送卡可以控制路由模块经第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口将区域控制信息传输至第二发送卡。According to some embodiments, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the first sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port. When the first sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module, the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
易于理解的是,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则Q发送卡经第一路由网口q1路由网口将区域控制信息传输至q路由模块。当Q发送卡将区域控制信息传输至q路由模块时,Q发送卡可以控制路由模块经第二路由网口q2路由网口和第二发送卡网口q3发送卡网口将区域控制信息传输至W发送卡。It is easy to understand that if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the Q sending card transmits the area control information to the q routing module through the first routing network port q1 routing network port. When the Q sending card transmits the area control information to the q routing module, the Q sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second routing network port q2 routing network port and the second sending card network port q3 sending card network port W Send card.
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡将区域控制信息传输至路由模块,第一发送卡可以控制路由模块经第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口将区域控制信息传输至第二发送卡,具体为:第一发送卡可以控制路由模块基于第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口的第二网络地址将区域控制信息传输至第二发送卡。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module, the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port Specifically, the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card based on the second network address of the second routing network port and the second network port of the second sending card.
易于理解的是,本申请实施例可以采用网络传输方式进行区域控制信息的传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高区域控制信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。It is easy to understand that the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method to transmit the area control information without using the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the area control information, reduce the screen control time, and increase the screen control speed. At the same time, due to The first sending card is provided with a routing module, which can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
S309,基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。S309. Based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation.
具体过程如上所述,此处不再赘述。The specific process is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
根据一些实施例,步骤S307、S308和步骤309的执行顺序可以是同时进行的,即第一发送卡基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作时,第一发送卡可以将该区域控制信息传输至第二发送卡。According to some embodiments, the execution sequence of steps S307, S308 and step 309 can be performed simultaneously, that is, when the first sending card controls the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform display operations based on the area control information, the first sending card can The area control information is transmitted to the second sending card.
在本申请一个或多个实施例中,获取第一发送卡的排序信息,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则经第一发送卡网口获取外部路由器向第一发送卡网口配置的第三网络地址,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址,无需每张发送卡连接至外部路由器,仅第一张发送卡连接至外部路由器即可,可以简化屏幕控制装置结构的复杂度,简化屏幕控制装置,可以提高屏幕控制的便利性。其次,本申请实施例可以采用网络传输方式进行信息传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高传输信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。In one or more embodiments of the present application, the sorting information of the first sending card is obtained. If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, the external The router configures the third network address to the network port of the first sending card. If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, the routing module is controlled to configure the first network address to the first routing network port. , and configure the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card through the second routing network port. It is not necessary to connect each sending card to the external router, only the first sending card is connected to the external router. Simplifying the complexity of the structure of the screen control device and simplifying the screen control device can improve the convenience of screen control. Secondly, the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method for information transmission, without using the serial port method to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information, reduce the screen control time, and improve the screen control speed. The module can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
请参见图12,图12示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图。具体的:Referring to FIG. 12 , FIG. 12 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application. specific:
S401,获取第一发送卡的排序信息;S401. Obtain the sorting information of the first sending card;
具体过程如上所述,此处不再赘述。The specific process is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
S402,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则经第一发送卡网口向终端网口配置第四网络地址;S402, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, configure the fourth network address to the terminal network port through the network port of the first sending card;
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡获取到第一发送卡的排序信息时,第一发送卡可以判断排序信息是否指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡。第一发送卡获取到排序信息例如可以是该发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card acquires the sorting information of the first sending card, the first sending card may determine whether the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set. The sorting information obtained by the first sending card may be, for example, that the sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set.
易于理解的是,图13示出本申请实施例屏幕控制方法的系统架构图。如图13所示,本申请实施例的执行主体为第一发送卡,该第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,该第一发送卡经第一发送卡网口连接至终端。其中,第一发送卡可以通过网线经第一发送卡网口连接至与终端。It is easy to understand that FIG. 13 shows a system architecture diagram of a screen control method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 13, the executive subject of the embodiment of the present application is the first sending card, which is the first sending card in the sending card set, and the first sending card is connected to the terminal. Wherein, the first sending card may be connected to the terminal through a network port of the first sending card through a network cable.
可选的,若第一发送卡获取到的排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,且该第一发送卡经第一发送卡网口连接至终端。若第一发送卡检测到第一发送卡网口与终端网口连接时,第一发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口向终端网口配置第四网络地址。Optionally, if the sorting information obtained by the first sending card indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, and the first sending card is connected to the terminal through the network port of the first sending card. If the first sending card detects that the network port of the first sending card is connected to the network port of the terminal, the first sending card may configure the fourth network address to the network port of the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
根据一些实施例,第四网络地址是指在第一发送卡的第一发送卡网口连接至终端的终端网口时,第一发送卡控制路由模块向终端网口配置的网络地址。该第四网络地址并不特指某一固定网络地址。例如当第一发送卡接收到针对第四网络地址的地址修改指令时,第一发送卡可以基于该地址修改指令修改该第四网络地址。According to some embodiments, the fourth network address refers to the network address configured by the first sending card control routing module to the terminal network port when the first sending card network port of the first sending card is connected to the terminal network port of the terminal. The fourth network address does not specifically refer to a certain fixed network address. For example, when the first sending card receives an address modification instruction for the fourth network address, the first sending card may modify the fourth network address based on the address modification instruction.
可选的,若Q发送卡获取到的排序信息指示Q发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,且该第Q发送卡经第一发送卡网口q3发送卡网口连接至M终端。若Q发送卡检测到第一发送卡网口q3发送卡网口与终端网口连接时,Q发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口q3发送卡网口向终端网口配置第四网络地址。该第四网络地址例如可以是123.89.76.698。Optionally, if the sorting information obtained by the Q sending card indicates that the Q sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, and the Qth sending card is connected to the M terminal. If the Q sending card detects that the first sending card network port q3 is connected to the terminal network port, the Q sending card can configure the fourth network address to the terminal network port through the first sending card network port q3 sending card network port. The fourth network address may be, for example, 123.89.76.698.
根据一些实施例,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则第一发送卡经第一发送卡网口向终端网口配置第四网络地址之后,第一发送卡还可以接收地址修改指令。基于地址修改指令,对第一网络地址进行修改,得到修改后的第一网络地址,修改后的第一网络地址对应的第一网段和第四网络地址对应的第二网段相同,以便提高信息传输的速度,提高信息传输的准确性。According to some embodiments, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, after the first sending card configures the fourth network address to the terminal network port through the network port of the first sending card, the first The sending card can also receive address modification instructions. Based on the address modification instruction, the first network address is modified to obtain a modified first network address, and the first network segment corresponding to the modified first network address is the same as the second network segment corresponding to the fourth network address, so as to improve The speed of information transmission improves the accuracy of information transmission.
易于理解的是,该地址修改指令包括但限于语音修改指令、点击修改指令等等。当第一发送卡经第一发送卡网口向终端网口配置第四网络地址之后,第一发送卡可以获取第一网络地址对应的第一网段和第四网络地址对应的第二网段。若第一网段和第二网段不一致,则第一发送卡可以发出提示信息,并接收针对该提示信息的地址修改指令。例如第一发送卡可以发出提示信息至上位机,上位机可以基于该提示信息发 送地址修改指令至第一发送卡。It is easy to understand that the address modification instruction includes but is limited to a voice modification instruction, a click modification instruction, and the like. After the first sending card configures the fourth network address to the terminal network port through the network port of the first sending card, the first sending card can obtain the first network segment corresponding to the first network address and the second network segment corresponding to the fourth network address . If the first network segment is inconsistent with the second network segment, the first sending card may send a prompt message and receive an address modification instruction for the prompt message. For example, the first sending card can send a prompt message to the host computer, and the host computer can send an address modification instruction to the first sending card based on the prompt message.
S403,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址;S403, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, then control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and send the address to the second sending card through the second routing network port Configure the second network address for the network port of the second sending card;
根据一些实施例,第一发送卡的第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口连接,第二发送卡为发送卡集合中与第一发送卡相邻的下一张发送卡,第二发送卡网口是第二发送卡的网口。该第二发送送卡网口并不特指某一固定发送卡网口。例如当第二发送卡发生变化时,该第二发送卡网口也会相应变化。According to some embodiments, the second routing network port of the first sending card is connected to the network port of the second sending card, the second sending card is the next sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, and the second sending card The network port of the card is the network port of the second sending card. The second sending card network port does not specifically refer to a fixed sending card network port. For example, when the second sending card changes, the network port of the second sending card will also change accordingly.
易于理解的是,第一发送卡获取到第一发送卡的排序信息时,第一发送卡可以判断该排序信息是否指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡。若第一发送卡确定该排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则第一发送卡可以控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址。It is easy to understand that, when the first sending card obtains the sorting information of the first sending card, the first sending card can determine whether the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set. If the first sending card determines that the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, then the first sending card can control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and through the first sending card The second routing network port configures the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card.
易于理解的是,发送卡集合中排序信息从第一张到最后一张的发送卡例如可以是Q发送卡、W发送卡、E发送卡、R发送卡和T发送卡。第一发送卡例如可以是Q发送卡。Q发送卡包括q路由模块、第一路由网口q1路由网口、第二路由网口q2路由网口、第一发送卡网口q3发送卡网口,W发送卡包括第二发送卡网口w3发送卡网口,w3发送卡网口和w2路由网口连接。当Q发送卡基于获取到的Q发送卡的排序信息确定Q发送卡为第一张发送卡时,Q发送卡可以控制q路由模块给q1路由网口配置第一网络地址,该第一网络地址例如可以是IP地址,该第一地址例如可以是123.12.123.12。Q发送卡经第二路由网口q2路由网口向第二发送卡W发送卡的第二发送卡网口w3发送卡网口配置第二网络地址。该第二网络地址例如可以是IP地址,该第二地址例如可以是123.12.123.13。It is easy to understand that the sending cards whose information is sorted from the first to the last in the sending card set may be, for example, a Q sending card, a W sending card, an E sending card, an R sending card, and a T sending card. The first sending card may be, for example, a Q sending card. Q sending card includes q routing module, first routing network port q1 routing network port, second routing network port q2 routing network port, first sending card network port q3 sending card network port, W sending card includes second sending card network port The w3 sending card network port is connected to the w2 routing network port. When the Q sending card determines that the Q sending card is the first sending card based on the obtained sorting information of the Q sending card, the Q sending card can control the q routing module to configure the first network address for the q1 routing network port. The first network address For example, it may be an IP address, and the first address may be, for example, 123.12.123.12. The Q sending card configures the second network address to the second sending card network port w3 of the sending card network port of the second sending card W via the second routing network port q2. The second network address may be, for example, an IP address, and the second address may be, for example, 123.12.123.13.
S404,基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型;S404, acquire the transmission information based on the routing module, and acquire the information type of the transmission information;
具体过程如上所述,此处不再赘述。The specific process is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
S405,若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则经第一路由网口获取回传信息;S405. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, obtain the return information through the first routing network port;
根据一些实施例,当排序信息指示第一发送卡是发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡时,第一发送卡可以经第一路由网口获取回传信息。该回传信息为第二发送卡经第二发送卡网口、第一发送卡的第二路由网口传输至路由模块的信息。According to some embodiments, when the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, the first sending card may obtain the return information through the first routing network port. The return information is the information transmitted by the second sending card to the routing module through the network port of the second sending card and the second routing network port of the first sending card.
易于理解的是,当第一发送卡获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以获取传输信息的信息类型。若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息时,则第一发送卡可以经第一路由网口获取该回传信息。具体的,第一发送卡可以基于第一网络地址获取该回传信息。例如Q发送卡可以基于第一网络地址123.12.123.12获取W发送卡传输该回传信息。It is easy to understand that when the first sending card acquires the transmission information, the first sending card can acquire the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card may obtain the return information through the first routing network port. Specifically, the first sending card may acquire the returned information based on the first network address. For example, the Q sending card can obtain the W sending card to transmit the return information based on the first network address 123.12.123.12.
S406,经第一发送卡网口将回传信息传输至终端;S406, transmit the returned information to the terminal through the network port of the first sending card;
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以获取第一传输信息的信息类型。若该信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则第一发送卡经第一路由网口获取该回传信息。当第一发送卡经第一路由网口获取到回传信息时,第一发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口将回传信息传输至终端。本申请实施例可以采用网络传输方式经第一发送卡网口进行回传信息的传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高回传信息的传输速度,减少回传信息的传输时间,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card acquires the transmission information, the first sending card may acquire the information type of the first transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card obtains the return information through the first routing network port. When the first sending card obtains the returned information through the first routing network port, the first sending card may transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first sending card network port. In the embodiment of the present application, the network transmission method can be used to transmit the returned information through the network port of the first sending card, and there is no need to use the serial port to obtain the transmitted information, which can increase the transmission speed of the returned information and reduce the transmission time of the returned information. At the same time, due to The first sending card is provided with a routing module, which can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
易于理解的是,图14示出本申请实施例一种回传信息传输方法的举例示意图。例如Q发送卡的q路由模块获取到W发送卡经W发送卡的第二发送卡网口w3发送卡网口传输的回传信息时,Q发送卡可以通过q1路由网口从路由模块中获取到该回传信息。当Q发送卡获取到回传信息时,Q发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口w3发送卡网口将回传信息传输至M终端。It is easy to understand that FIG. 14 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application. For example, when the q routing module of the Q sending card obtains the return information transmitted by the W sending card through the second sending card network port w3 of the W sending card, the Q sending card can obtain it from the routing module through the q1 routing network port. to the return information. When the Q sending card obtains the returned information, the Q sending card may transmit the returned information to the M terminal through the network port w3 of the sending card of the first sending card.
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以获取第一传输信息的信息类型。若该信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则第一发送卡第一路由网口获取该回传信息。当第一发送卡经第一路由网口获取到回传信息时,第一发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口将回传信息至终端。具体地,第二发送卡可以基于第二发送卡网口的第二网络地址和第一发送卡的第二路由网口将回传信息传输至第一发送卡的路由模块。第一发送卡可以基于第一网络地址获取路由模块中的回传信息。当第一发送卡获取到回传信息时,第一发送卡可以基于第一发送卡网口的第三网络地址将回传信息发送至终端。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card acquires the transmission information, the first sending card may acquire the information type of the first transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first routing network port of the first sending card acquires the return information. When the first sending card obtains the returned information through the first routing network port, the first sending card may send the returned information to the terminal through the first sending card network port. Specifically, the second sending card may transmit the return information to the routing module of the first sending card based on the second network address of the network port of the second sending card and the second routing network port of the first sending card. The first sending card may acquire the return information in the routing module based on the first network address. When the first sending card acquires the returned information, the first sending card may send the returned information to the terminal based on the third network address of the network port of the first sending card.
可选的,Q发送卡可以基于第二发送卡网口的第二网络地址123.12.123.13和Q发送卡的第二路由网口q2路由网口将回传信息传输至Q发送卡的q路由模块。Q发送卡可以基于q1路由网口的第一网络地址123.12.123.12获取q路由模块中的回传信息。当Q发送卡获取到回传信息时,Q发送卡可以基于第一发送卡网口q3发送卡网口的第三网络地址123.89.76.678将回传信息发送至M终端。Optionally, the Q sending card can transmit the return information to the q routing module of the Q sending card based on the second network address 123.12.123.13 of the network port of the second sending card and the second routing network port q2 routing network port of the Q sending card . The Q sending card can obtain the return information in the q routing module based on the first network address 123.12.123.12 of the q1 routing network port. When the Q sending card obtains the returned information, the Q sending card may send the returned information to the M terminal based on the third network address 123.89.76.678 of the first sending card network port q3 sending card network port.
S407,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块;S407, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, transmit the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port;
根据一些实施例,当排序信息指示第一发送卡是发送卡集合中的第一发送卡时,第一发送卡可以获取传输信息的信息类型。该区域控制信息是第一发送卡通过第一发送卡网口获取到的,该区域控制信息为终端经第一发送卡网口传输至第一发送卡的。若第一发送卡确定传输信息的信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息时,则第一发送卡可以经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块。According to some embodiments, when the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, the first sending card may acquire the information type of the transmission information. The area control information is obtained by the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card, and the area control information is transmitted by the terminal to the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card. If the first sending card determines that the information type of the transmission information indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the first sending card may transmit the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port.
易于理解的是,图15示出本申请实施例一种区域控制信息传输方法的举例示意图。例如Q发送卡通过q3发送卡网口获取到终端发送的区域控制信息时,Q发送卡可以将该区域信息经第一路由网口q1路由网口传输至q路由模块。It is easy to understand that FIG. 15 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application. For example, when the Q sending card obtains the area control information sent by the terminal through the q3 sending card network port, the Q sending card can transmit the area information to the q routing module through the first routing network port q1 routing network port.
根据一些实施例,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块时,第一发送卡可以基于第一发送卡网口的第三网络地址获取外部路由器发送的区域控制信息。当第一发送卡获取到区域控制信息时,第一发送卡可以基于第一网络地址将该区域控制信息发送至路由模块。According to some embodiments, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, when the area control information is transmitted to the routing module through the first routing network port, the first sending card may be based on the third network address of the first sending card network port Obtain the zone control information sent by the external router. When the first sending card acquires the area control information, the first sending card may send the area control information to the routing module based on the first network address.
易于理解的是,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则Q发送卡经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块时,Q发送卡可以基于第一发送卡网口q3发送卡网口的第三网络地址123.89.76.678获取外部路由器发送的区域控制信息。当Q发送卡获取到区域控制信息时,Q发送卡可以基于第一网络地址123.12.123.12将该区域控制信息发送至q路由模块。It is easy to understand that if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, when the Q sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port, the Q sending card can transmit the information based on the first sending card network port q3 sending card The third network address 123.89.76.678 of the network port obtains the area control information sent by the external router. When the Q sending card acquires the area control information, the Q sending card may send the area control information to the q routing module based on the first network address 123.12.123.12.
S408,控制路由模块经第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口将区域控制信息传输至第二发送卡;S408, controlling the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port;
根据一些实施例,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则第一发送卡经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块。当第一发送卡将区域控制信息传输至路由模块时,第一发送卡可以控制路由模块经第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口将区域控制信息传输至第二发送卡。本申请实施例可以采用网络传输方式控制路由模块经第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口进行区域控制信息的传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高区域控制信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。According to some embodiments, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the first sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port. When the first sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module, the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port. In the embodiment of the present application, the network transmission method can be used to control the routing module to transmit the area control information through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port, without using the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can improve the transmission speed of the area control information and reduce The screen control time improves the screen control speed. At the same time, because the first sending card is provided with a routing module, the steps of network address setting can be reduced, the steps of screen control can be reduced, and the convenience of screen area control can be improved.
易于理解的是,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则Q发送卡经第一路由网口q1路由网口将区域控制信息传输至q路由模块。当Q发送卡将区域控制信息传输至q路由模块时,Q发送卡可以控制路由模块经第二路由网口q2路由网口和第二发送卡网口q3发送卡网口将区域控制信息传输至W发送卡。It is easy to understand that if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the Q sending card transmits the area control information to the q routing module through the first routing network port q1 routing network port. When the Q sending card transmits the area control information to the q routing module, the Q sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second routing network port q2 routing network port and the second sending card network port q3 sending card network port W Send card.
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡将区域控制信息传输至路由模块,第一发送卡可以控制路由模块经第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口将区域控制信息传输至第二发送卡,具体为:第一发送卡可以控制路由模块基于第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口的第二网络地址将区域控制信息传输至第二发送卡。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module, the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port Specifically, the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card based on the second network address of the second routing network port and the second network port of the second sending card.
S409,基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。S409. Based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation.
具体过程如上所述,此处不再赘述。The specific process is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
在本申请一个或多个实施例中,获取第一发送卡的排序信息,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则经第一发送卡网口向终端网口配置第四网络地址,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址,因此在没有外部路由器的场景时,第一发送卡可以配置终端网口的网络地址,使得第一发送卡可以和终端采用网络传输方式传输信息,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高传输信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时,终端与发送卡之间无需复杂的接线,可以简化屏幕控制装置结构的复杂度,简化屏幕控制装置,可以提高屏幕控制的便利性。其次,本申请实施例中由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。In one or more embodiments of the present application, the sorting information of the first sending card is obtained, and if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, then the network port of the first sending card is sent to the terminal The network port is configured with the fourth network address. If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, the routing module is controlled to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and through the second routing network Configure the second network address to the network port of the second sending card on the second sending card. Therefore, in the scenario where there is no external router, the first sending card can configure the network address of the terminal network port, so that the first sending card can communicate with the terminal. The network transmission method transmits information without using the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information, reduce the screen control time, and improve the screen control speed. At the same time, there is no need for complicated wiring between the terminal and the sending card, which can simplify the screen control device. The complexity of the structure and the simplification of the screen control device can improve the convenience of the screen control. Secondly, in the embodiment of the present application, since the first sending card is provided with a routing module, the steps of network address setting can be reduced, the steps of screen control can be reduced, and the convenience of screen area control can be improved.
请参见图16,图16示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图。具体的:Please refer to FIG. 16 , which shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application. specific:
S501,获取第一发送卡的排序信息;S501, acquiring the sorting information of the first sending card;
具体过程如上所述,此处不再赘述。The specific process is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
S502,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中除第一张发送卡和最后一张发送卡之外的任一发送卡,则控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址;S502, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, then control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port , and configure the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card through the second routing network port;
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡获取到第一发送卡的排序信息时,第一发送卡可以判断该排序信息是否指示该第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡和最后一张发送卡。当第一发送卡确定排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中除第一张发送卡和最后一张发送卡之外的任一发送卡时,第一发送卡控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址。其中,第一发送卡的第二路由网口未配置网络地址。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card obtains the sorting information of the first sending card, the first sending card can determine whether the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card and the last sending card in the sending card set. A sending card. When the first sending card determines that the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, the first sending card controls the routing module to the first routing The network port is configured with the first network address, and the network port of the second sending card of the second sending card is configured with the second network address through the second routing network port. Wherein, the second routing network port of the first sending card is not configured with a network address.
易于理解的是,发送卡集合中排序信息从第一张到最后一张的发送卡例如可以是Q发送卡、W发送卡、E发送卡、R发送卡和T发送卡。第一发送卡例如可以是W发送卡,第二发送卡例如可以是E发送卡,第三发送卡为Q发送卡。W发送卡包括w路由模块、第一路由网口w1路由网口、第二路由网口w2路由网口、第一发送卡网口w3发送卡网口,E发送卡包括第二发送卡网口e3发送卡网口,e3发送卡网口和w2路由网口连接。当W发送卡基于获取到的W发送卡的排序信息确定W发送卡为第二张发送卡时,W发送卡可以控制w路由模块给w1路由网口配置第一网络地址,该第一网络地址例如可以是IP地址,该第一地址例如可以是123.12.123.12。W发送卡经第二路由网口w2路由网口向第二发送卡E发送卡的第二发送卡网口e3发送卡网口配置第二网络地址。该第二网络地址例如可以是IP地址,该第二地址例如可以是123.12.123.13。It is easy to understand that the sending cards whose information is sorted from the first to the last in the sending card set may be, for example, a Q sending card, a W sending card, an E sending card, an R sending card, and a T sending card. The first sending card may be, for example, a W sending card, the second sending card may be, for example, an E sending card, and the third sending card may be a Q sending card. W sending card includes w routing module, first routing network port w1 routing network port, second routing network port w2 routing network port, first sending card network port w3 sending card network port, E sending card includes second sending card network port The e3 sending card network port is connected to the w2 routing network port. When the W sending card determines that the W sending card is the second sending card based on the obtained sorting information of the W sending card, the W sending card can control the w routing module to configure the first network address for the w1 routing network port. The first network address For example, it may be an IP address, and the first address may be, for example, 123.12.123.12. The W sending card configures the second network address to the second sending card network port e3 of the sending card network port of the second sending card E via the second routing network port w2. The second network address may be, for example, an IP address, and the second address may be, for example, 123.12.123.13.
S503,基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型;S503, acquire the transmission information based on the routing module, and acquire the information type of the transmission information;
具体过程如上所述,此处不再赘述。The specific process is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
S504,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中除第一张发送卡和最后一张发送卡之外的任一发送卡,且信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则经第一路由网口获取回传信息;S504. If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then the The routing network port obtains the return information;
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡基于路由模块获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以获取传输信息的信息类型。例如当路由模块通过第一发送卡的第二路由网口、路由模块和第一路由网口获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以确定该传输信息的信息类型为回传信息类型。当第一发送卡确定该信息类型指示该传输信息为回传信息时,第一发送卡可以经第一路由网口获取回传信息。该回传信息为第二发送卡经第二发送卡网口、第一发送卡的第二路由网口传输至第一发送卡的路由模块的信息。具体的,第一发送卡可以基于第一网络地址获取该回传信息。例如W发送卡可以基于第一网络地址123.12.123.12获取该回传信息。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, the first sending card may obtain the information type of the transmission information. For example, when the routing module obtains the transmission information through the second routing network port of the first sending card, the routing module and the first routing network port, the first sending card may determine that the information type of the transmission information is the return information type. When the first sending card determines that the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card may obtain the return information through the first routing network port. The return information is the information transmitted by the second sending card to the routing module of the first sending card through the network port of the second sending card and the second routing network port of the first sending card. Specifically, the first sending card may acquire the returned information based on the first network address. For example, the W sending card may acquire the return information based on the first network address 123.12.123.12.
S505,将回传信息经第一发送卡网口、第三发送卡的第三路由网口传输至第三发送卡;S505, transmit the returned information to the third sending card through the network port of the first sending card and the third routing network port of the third sending card;
根据一些实施例,第三发送卡为发送卡集合中与第一发送卡相邻的上一张发送卡,即第三发送卡是指发送卡集合中与第一发送卡相邻的且靠近终端的上一张发送卡。该第三发送卡并不特指某一固定发送卡。例如当第一发送卡发生变化时,该第三发送卡也会相应变化。According to some embodiments, the third sending card is the last sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, that is, the third sending card refers to the sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set and close to the terminal The previous sent card. The third sending card does not specifically refer to a certain fixed sending card. For example, when the first sending card changes, the third sending card will also change accordingly.
易于理解的是,当第一发送卡获取到传输信息时,第一发送卡可以获取第一传输信息的信息类型。若该信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则第一发送卡经第一路由网口获取该回传信息。当第一发送卡经第一路由网口获取到回传信息时,第一发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口将回传信息传输至终端。具体的,第一发送卡可以将回传信息经第一发送卡网口、第三发送的第三路由网口传输至第三发送卡。第三发送卡可以将该回传信息传输至终端。第三路由网口与第一发送卡网口连接,回传信息为第二发送卡经第二发送卡网口和第二路由口传输的。It is easy to understand that when the first sending card obtains the transmission information, the first sending card may obtain the information type of the first transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the first sending card obtains the return information through the first routing network port. When the first sending card obtains the returned information through the first routing network port, the first sending card may transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first sending card network port. Specifically, the first sending card may transmit the returned information to the third sending card through the network port of the first sending card and the third routing network port of the third sending card. The third sending card may transmit the returned information to the terminal. The third routing network port is connected to the first sending card network port, and the return information is transmitted by the second sending card through the second sending card network port and the second routing port.
可选的,本申请实施例可以采用网络传输方式经第一发送卡网口、第三发送卡的第三路由网口进行回传信息的传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高回传信息的传输速度,减少回传信息的传输时间,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。Optionally, the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method to transmit the return information through the network port of the first sending card and the third routing network port of the third sending card. It is not necessary to use the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can improve the return transmission rate. The speed of information transmission reduces the transmission time of returned information. At the same time, because the first sending card is provided with a routing module, the steps of network address setting can be reduced, the steps of screen control can be reduced, and the convenience of screen area control can be improved.
易于理解的是,图17示出本申请实施例一种回传信息传输方法的举例示意图。例如W发送卡的路由 模块获取到E发送卡经W发送卡的第二路由网口w2路由网口和E发送卡的e3发送卡网口传输的回传信息时,W发送卡可以通过第一路由网口w1路由网口从w路由模块中获取到该回传信息。当W发送卡获取到回传信息时,W发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口w3发送卡网口将回传信息传输至第三发送卡Q发送卡。Q发送卡可以将该回传信息传输至M终端。It is easy to understand that FIG. 17 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application. For example, when the routing module of the W sending card obtains the return information transmitted by the E sending card through the second routing network port w2 of the W sending card and the e3 sending card network port of the E sending card, the W sending card can pass the first The routing network port w1 obtains the returned information from the w routing module. When the W sending card obtains the return information, the W sending card can transmit the return information to the third sending card Q sending card through the first sending card network port w3 sending card network port. The Q sending card can transmit the return information to the M terminal.
S506,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中除第一张发送卡和最后一张发送卡之外的任一发送卡,且信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块;S506. If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then the The routing network port transmits the area control information to the routing module;
根据一些实施例,当排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中除第一张发送卡和最后一张发送卡之外的任一发送卡时,第一发送卡可以获取传输信息的信息类型。该区域控制信息为第三发送卡经第三发送卡的第三路由网口和第一发送卡网口传输的,其中第三路由网口与第一发送卡网口连接。若第一发送卡确定传输信息的信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息时,则第一发送卡可以将区域控制信息经第一路由网口传输至路由模块。According to some embodiments, when the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, the first sending card can obtain the information type of the transmission information . The area control information is transmitted by the third sending card through the third routing network port of the third sending card and the first sending card network port, wherein the third routing network port is connected to the first sending card network port. If the first sending card determines that the information type of the transmission information indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the first sending card may transmit the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port.
易于理解的是,图18示出本申请实施例一种区域控制信息传输方法的举例示意图。例如W发送卡通过w3发送卡网口获取到Q发送卡经Q发送卡的第二路由网口q2路由网口传输的区域控制信息时,W发送卡可以将该区域信息经第一路由网口w1路由网口传输至w路由模块。It is easy to understand that FIG. 18 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application. For example, when the W sending card obtains the area control information transmitted by the Q sending card through the w3 sending card network port through the second routing network port q2 routing network port of the Q sending card, the W sending card can pass the area information through the first routing network port The w1 routing network port transmits to the w routing module.
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡确定信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,第一发送卡经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块时,第一发送卡可以基于第一网络地址将区域控制信息传输至路由模块,即第一发送卡可以将区域控制信息传输至第一网络地址对应的第一路由网口,再传输至路由模块。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card determines that the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, and the first sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port, the first sending card may be based on the first network The address transmits the area control information to the routing module, that is, the first sending card can transmit the area control information to the first routing network port corresponding to the first network address, and then to the routing module.
S507,控制路由模块经第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口将区域控制信息传输至第二发送卡;S507, controlling the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port;
根据一些实施例,若第一发送卡为发送卡集合中除第一张发送卡和最后一张发送卡之外的任一发送卡,且第一发送卡获取到传输信息的信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则第一发送卡经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块。当第一发送卡将区域控制信息传输至路由模块时,第一发送卡可以控制路由模块经第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口将区域控制信息传输至第二发送卡。According to some embodiments, if the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, and the information type of the transmission information obtained by the first sending card indicates the transmission information If it is regional control information, the first sending card transmits the regional control information to the routing module through the first routing network port. When the first sending card transmits the area control information to the routing module, the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
可选的,本申请实施例可以采用网络传输方式控制路由模块经第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口进行区域控制信息的传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高区域控制信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the network transmission method can be used to control the routing module to transmit the area control information through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port, without using the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can improve the area control information. The transmission speed reduces the screen control time and improves the screen control speed. At the same time, because the first sending card is provided with a routing module, the network address setting steps can be reduced, the screen control steps can be reduced, and the convenience of screen area control is improved.
易于理解的是,若W发送卡为发送卡集合中除第一张发送卡和最后一张发送卡之外的任一发送卡,且W发送卡获取到的传输信息的信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则W发送卡经第一路由网口w1路由网口将区域控制信息传输至w路由模块。当W发送卡将区域控制信息传输至w路由模块时,W发送卡可以控制路由模块经第二路由网口w2路由网口和第二发送卡网口e3发送卡网口将区域控制信息传输至E发送卡。It is easy to understand that if the W sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, and the information type of the transmission information obtained by the W sending card indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the W sending card transmits the area control information to the w routing module via the first routing network port w1 routing network port. When the W sending card transmits the regional control information to the w routing module, the W sending card can control the routing module to transmit the regional control information to the routing module via the second routing network port w2 routing network port and the second sending card network port e3 E Send card.
根据一些实施例,当第一发送卡可以基于第一网络地址将区域控制信息传输至路由模块时,第一发送卡可以控制路由模块经第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口将区域控制信息传输至第二发送卡,具体的,第一发送卡可以控制路由模块将区域控制信息传输至第二路由网口,再将区域控制信息传输至第二网络地址对应的第二发送卡网口,第二发送卡网口设置在第二发送卡上,第二发送卡可以接收到第一发送卡传输的区域控制信息。According to some embodiments, when the first sending card can transmit the area control information to the routing module based on the first network address, the first sending card can control the routing module to transfer the area control information to the routing module via the second routing network port and the second sending card network port. The information is transmitted to the second sending card. Specifically, the first sending card can control the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second routing network port, and then transmit the area control information to the network port of the second sending card corresponding to the second network address , the network port of the second sending card is set on the second sending card, and the second sending card can receive the area control information transmitted by the first sending card.
S508,基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。S508. Based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation.
具体过程如上所述,此处不再赘述。The specific process is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
在本申请一个或多个实施例中,获取第一发送卡的排序信息,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中除第一张发送卡和最后一张发送卡之外的任一发送卡,则控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址,无需每张发送卡连接至外部路由器,可以简化屏幕控制装置结构的复杂度,简化屏幕控制装置,可以提高屏幕控制的便利性。其次,本申请实施例可以采用网络传输方式进行信息传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,减少多级送卡连接时对信息传输速度的影响,可以提高传输信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控 制的便利性。In one or more embodiments of the present application, the sorting information of the first sending card is acquired, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card Sending card, then control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and configure the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card through the second routing network port, without connecting each sending card To an external router, the complexity of the structure of the screen control device can be simplified, and the convenience of screen control can be improved by simplifying the screen control device. Secondly, the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method for information transmission, without using the serial port method to obtain the transmission information, reducing the impact on the information transmission speed during the multi-level card sending connection, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information and reduce the screen control time. The speed of screen control is improved, and at the same time, since the first sending card is provided with a routing module, the steps of network address setting can be reduced, the steps of screen control can be reduced, and the convenience of screen area control can be improved.
请参见图19,图19示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图。具体的:Please refer to FIG. 19 , which shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application. specific:
S601,获取第一发送卡的排序信息;S601. Obtain the sorting information of the first sending card;
具体过程如上所述,此处不在赘述。The specific process is as described above and will not be repeated here.
S602,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡,则控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址;S602, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, then controlling the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port;
易于理解的是,第一发送卡获取到第一发送卡的排序信息时,第一发送卡可以判断该排序信息是否指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡。若第一发送卡确定该排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡,则第一发送卡可以控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址。It is easy to understand that, when the first sending card obtains the sorting information of the first sending card, the first sending card can determine whether the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set. If the first sending card determines that the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, the first sending card may control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port.
易于理解的是,发送卡集合中排序信息从第一张到最后一张的发送卡例如可以是Q发送卡、W发送卡、E发送卡、R发送卡和T发送卡。第一发送卡例如可以是T发送卡。第三发送卡例如可以是R发送卡。T发送卡包括t路由模块、第一路由网口t1路由网口、第二路由网口t2路由网口、第一发送卡网口t3发送卡网口,R发送卡包括第四路由网口r2路由网口,r2路由网口和t3发送卡网口连接。当T发送卡基于获取到的T发送卡的排序信息确定T发送卡为最后一张发送卡时,T发送卡可以控制t路由模块给t1路由网口配置第一网络地址,该第一网络地址例如可以是IP地址,该第一地址例如可以是123.12.123.12。It is easy to understand that the sending cards whose information is sorted from the first to the last in the sending card set may be, for example, a Q sending card, a W sending card, an E sending card, an R sending card, and a T sending card. The first sending card may be, for example, a T sending card. The third sending card may be, for example, an R sending card. T sending card includes t routing module, first routing network port t1 routing network port, second routing network port t2 routing network port, first sending card network port t3 sending card network port, R sending card includes fourth routing network port r2 Routing network port, r2 routing network port and t3 sending card network port are connected. When the T sending card determines that the T sending card is the last sending card based on the obtained sorting information of the T sending card, the T sending card can control the t routing module to configure the first network address for the t1 routing network port. The first network address For example, it may be an IP address, and the first address may be, for example, 123.12.123.12.
S603,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡,且信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第一发送卡网口和第三发送卡的第三路由网口传输至第三发送卡;S603, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then send the return information through the network port of the first sending card and the third sending card The third routing network port of the transmission card is transmitted to the third sending card;
可选的,第一发送卡可以直接获取到回传信息,即该回传信息是由最后一发送卡生成的,并非其他发送卡传输的。当第一发送卡生成回传信息即最后一张发送卡生成回传信息时,第一发送卡可以经第一发送卡网口将回传信息经第一发送卡网口和第三发送卡的第四路由网口传输至第三发送卡。第三发送卡为发送卡集合中与第一发送卡相邻的上一张发送卡,即第三发送卡是指发送卡集合中与第一发送卡相邻的且靠近终端的上一张发送卡。其中,第四路由网口与第一发送卡网口连接。Optionally, the first sending card may directly obtain the returned information, that is, the returned information is generated by the last sending card, not transmitted by other sending cards. When the first sending card generates the return information, that is, when the last sending card generates the return information, the first sending card can pass the return information through the network port of the first sending card and the third sending card through the network port of the first sending card. The fourth routing network port transmits to the third sending card. The third sending card is the last sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, that is, the third sending card refers to the last sending card in the sending card set that is adjacent to the first sending card and close to the terminal. Card. Wherein, the fourth routing network port is connected to the first sending card network port.
易于理解的是,图20示出本申请实施例一种回传信息传输方法的举例示意图。当T发送卡接收到用户的回传指令时,T发送卡可以生成回传信息。当T发送卡获取到回传信息时,W发送卡可以将回传信息经第一发送卡网口t3发送卡网口和第三发送卡R发送卡的第四路由网口r2路由网口传输至第三发送卡R发送卡。It is easy to understand that FIG. 20 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a return information transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application. When the T-sending card receives the return instruction from the user, the T-sending card can generate the return information. When the T sending card obtains the return information, the W sending card can transmit the return information through the network port t3 of the first sending card and the fourth routing network port r2 of the third sending card R sending card. To the third sending card R sending card.
易于理解的是,本申请实施例的最后一张发送卡可以采用网络传输方式经第一发送卡网口和第三发送卡的第三路由网口进行回传信息的传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高回传信息的传输速度,减少回传信息的传输时间,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。It is easy to understand that the last sending card in the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method to transmit the return information through the network port of the first sending card and the third routing network port of the third sending card, without using the serial port method to obtain Transmission of information can increase the transmission speed of returned information and reduce the transmission time of returned information. At the same time, because the first sending card is equipped with a routing module, it can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control. sex.
S604,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡,且信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。S604, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to display operate.
根据一些实施例,区域控制信息是指第一发送卡获取到的,且指示第一发送卡对第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作的信息。该区域控制信息是第一发送卡经第一发送卡网口从终端获取的。当第一发送卡获取到排序信息,且基于该排序信息确定第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡时,第一发送卡可以获取第三发送卡经第三路由网口和第一发送卡网口传输的传输信息。若第一发送卡获取到该传输信息的信息类型,且该信息类型指示该传输信息为区域控制信息,则第一发送卡可以基于该控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。According to some embodiments, the area control information refers to information acquired by the first sending card and instructing the first sending card to perform a display operation on the screen area corresponding to the first sending card. The area control information is acquired by the first sending card from the terminal through the network port of the first sending card. When the first sending card obtains the sorting information, and based on the sorting information determines that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, the first sending card can obtain the third sending card via the third routing network port and The transmission information transmitted by the network port of the first sending card. If the first sending card obtains the information type of the transmission information, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then the first sending card can control the corresponding screen area of the first sending card to perform display operations based on the control information .
可选的,本申请实施例可以采用网络传输方式获取区域控制信息,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高区域控制信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。其次,在第一发送卡为最后一张发送卡,且传输信息为区域控制信息时,无需对该区域控制信息进行传输,可以减少屏幕控制的时长,可以提高屏幕控制的便利性。Optionally, the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method to obtain the area control information, without using the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the area control information, reduce the screen control time, and increase the screen control speed. At the same time, due to the first transmission The card is equipped with a routing module, which can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control. Secondly, when the first sending card is the last sending card and the transmission information is area control information, there is no need to transmit the area control information, which can reduce the duration of screen control and improve the convenience of screen control.
易于理解的是,图21示出本申请实施例一种区域控制信息传输方法的举例示意图。当T发送卡获取 到排序信息,且基于该排序信息确定T发送卡为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡时,T发送卡可以获取R发送卡经第四路由网口r2路由网口和第一发送卡网口t3发送卡网口传输的传输信息。若T发送卡获取到该传输信息的信息类型,且该信息类型指示该传输信息为区域控制信息时,则T发送卡可以基于该控制信息,控制T发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。It is easy to understand that FIG. 21 shows an exemplary schematic diagram of a method for transmitting area control information according to an embodiment of the present application. When the T sending card obtains the sorting information and determines that the T sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set based on the sorting information, the T sending card can obtain the R sending card via the fourth routing network port r2 routing network port and The network port t3 of the first sending card sends the transmission information transmitted by the network port of the sending card. If the T-sending card obtains the information type of the transmission information, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the T-sending card can control the corresponding screen area of the T-sending card to perform display operations based on the control information.
在本申请一个或多个实施例中,获取第一发送卡的排序信息,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡,则控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,该发送卡无需连接至外部路由器,可以简化屏幕控制装置结构的复杂度,简化屏幕控制装置,可以提高屏幕控制的便利性。其次,本申请实施例可以采用网络传输方式进行信息传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高传输信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。In one or more embodiments of the present application, the sorting information of the first sending card is obtained, and if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, the routing module is controlled to send the first sending card to the first routing network port The first network address is configured, the sending card does not need to be connected to an external router, the complexity of the structure of the screen control device can be simplified, the screen control device can be simplified, and the convenience of screen control can be improved. Secondly, the embodiment of the present application can use the network transmission method for information transmission, without using the serial port method to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information, reduce the screen control time, and improve the screen control speed. The module can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
下述为本申请装置实施例,可以用于执行本申请方法实施例。对于本申请装置实施例中未披露的细节,请参照本申请方法实施例。The following are device embodiments of the present application, which can be used to implement the method embodiments of the present application. For details not disclosed in the device embodiments of the present application, please refer to the method embodiments of the present application.
请参见图22,其示出了本申请一个示例性实施例提供的屏幕区域控制装置的结构示意图。该屏幕区域控制装置可以通过软件、硬件或者两者的结合实现成为装置的全部或一部分。该屏幕区域控制装置2200包括路由模块、第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口,该屏幕区域控制装置2200包括类型获取单元2201、信息传输单元2202和显示操作单元2203,其中:Please refer to FIG. 22 , which shows a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for controlling a screen area provided by an exemplary embodiment of the present application. The device for controlling the screen area can be implemented as all or a part of the device through software, hardware or a combination of the two. The screen area control device 2200 includes a routing module, a first routing network port and a first sending card network port, and the screen area control device 2200 includes a type acquisition unit 2201, an information transmission unit 2202 and a display operation unit 2203, wherein:
类型获取单元2201,用于基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型;A type acquiring unit 2201, configured to acquire the transmission information based on the routing module, and acquire the information type of the transmission information;
信息传输单元2202,用于若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口传输至终端;The information transmission unit 2202 is configured to transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information;
显示操作单元2203,用于若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,区域控制信息是经第一发送卡网口从终端获取的。The display operation unit 2203 is used to control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information. The area control information is sent from the terminal via the network port of the first sending card acquired.
根据一些实施例,图23示出本申请实施例一种屏幕区域控制装置的结构示意图。如图23所示,第一发送卡还包括第二路由网口,该屏幕区域控制装置2200还包括网络地址配置单元2204,用于基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型之前,获取第一发送卡的排序信息;According to some embodiments, FIG. 23 shows a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for controlling a screen area according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 23, the first sending card also includes a second routing network port, and the screen area control device 2200 also includes a network address configuration unit 2204, which is used to obtain transmission information based on the routing module, and before obtaining the information type of the transmission information, obtain sorting information of the first sending card;
若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中最后一张发送卡之前的任一发送卡,则控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址,第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口连接,第二发送卡为发送卡集合中与第一发送卡相邻的下一张发送卡。If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, the routing module is controlled to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and send the first network address to the second routing network port through the second routing network port. The network port of the second sending card of the second sending card is configured with the second network address, and the second routing network port is connected to the network port of the second sending card. The second sending card is the next one adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set. send card.
根据一些实施例,图24示出本申请实施例一种屏幕区域控制装置的结构示意图。如图24所示,显示操作单元2203包括信息传输子单元2213和显示操作子单元2223,显示操作单元2203,用于若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作时:According to some embodiments, FIG. 24 shows a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for controlling a screen area according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 24, the display operation unit 2203 includes an information transmission subunit 2213 and a display operation subunit 2223. The display operation unit 2203 is used to control the first When performing display operations on the screen area corresponding to the sending card:
信息传输子单元2213,用于若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中最后一张发送卡之前的任一发送卡,且信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则将区域控制信息经第一路由网口、路由模块、第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口传输至第二发送卡;The information transmission subunit 2213 is used to transmit the area control information through The first routing network port, the routing module, the second routing network port and the second sending card network port are transmitted to the second sending card;
显示操作子单元2223,用于基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。The display operation subunit 2223 is configured to control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information.
根据一些实施例,第一发送卡经第一发送卡网口连接至外部路由器,外部路由器与终端连接,网络地址配置单元2204,用于基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型之前,还具体用于:According to some embodiments, the first sending card is connected to the external router through the network port of the first sending card, and the external router is connected to the terminal. The network address configuration unit 2204 is used to obtain the transmission information based on the routing module. Before obtaining the information type of the transmission information, Also specifically for:
若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则经第一发送卡网口获取外部路由器向第一发送卡网口配置的第三网络地址。If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, obtain the third network address configured by the external router to the network port of the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card.
根据一些实施例,信息传输单元2202,用于若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口传输至终端时,具体用于:According to some embodiments, the information transmission unit 2202 is configured to transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, specifically for:
若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则经第一路由网口获取回传信息;If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then obtain the return information through the first routing network port;
经第一发送卡网口将回传信息传输至外部路由器,回传信息用于指示外部路由器将回传信息传输至终端。The return information is transmitted to the external router through the network port of the first sending card, and the return information is used to instruct the external router to transmit the return information to the terminal.
根据一些实施例,信息传输子单元2213,用于若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则将区域控 制信息经第一路由网口、第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口传输至第二发送卡时,具体用于:According to some embodiments, the information transmission subunit 2213 is configured to transmit the area control information to the When the second sending card is used specifically for:
若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块,区域控制信息为获取终端经外部路由器和第一发送卡网口传输的;If the information type indicates that the transmission information is regional control information, the regional control information is transmitted to the routing module through the first routing network port, and the regional control information is transmitted by the acquisition terminal through the external router and the first sending card network port;
控制路由模块经第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口将区域控制信息传输至第二发送卡。The control routing module transmits the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
根据一些实施例,第一发送卡网口与终端的终端网口连接,网络地址配置单元2204,用于基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型之前,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则经第一发送卡网口向终端网口配置第四网络地址。According to some embodiments, the network port of the first sending card is connected to the terminal network port of the terminal, and the network address configuration unit 2204 is configured to obtain the transmission information based on the routing module. Before obtaining the information type of the transmission information, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card If it is the first sending card in the sending card set, configure the fourth network address to the network port of the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
根据一些实施例,图25示出本申请实施例一种屏幕区域控制装置的结构示意图。如图25所示,该屏幕区域控制装置2200还包括地址修改单元2205,用于若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则经第一发送卡网口向终端网口配置第四网络地址之后,接收地址修改指令;According to some embodiments, FIG. 25 shows a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for controlling a screen area according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 25, the screen area control device 2200 also includes an address modifying unit 2205, configured to send an address to After the terminal network port is configured with the fourth network address, it receives an address modification instruction;
基于地址修改指令,对第一网络地址进行修改,得到修改后的第一网络地址,修改后的第一网络地址对应的第一网段和第四网络地址对应的第二网段相同。Based on the address modification instruction, the first network address is modified to obtain a modified first network address, and the first network segment corresponding to the modified first network address is the same as the second network segment corresponding to the fourth network address.
根据一些实施例,信息传输单元2202,用于若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口传输至终端时,具体用于:According to some embodiments, the information transmission unit 2202 is configured to transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, specifically for:
若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则经第一路由网口获取回传信息;If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then obtain the return information through the first routing network port;
经第一发送卡网口将回传信息传输至终端。The return information is transmitted to the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
根据一些实施例,信息传输子单元2213,用于若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则将区域控制信息经第一路由网口、第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口发送至第二发送卡时,具体用于:According to some embodiments, the information transmission subunit 2213 is configured to send the area control information to When the second sending card is used specifically for:
若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块,区域控制信息为获取终端经第一发送卡网口传输的;If the information type indicates that the transmission information is regional control information, the regional control information is transmitted to the routing module through the first routing network port, and the regional control information is transmitted by the acquisition terminal through the first sending card network port;
控制路由模块经第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口将区域控制信息发送至第二发送卡。The control routing module sends the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
根据一些实施例,信息传输单元2202,用于若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口传输至终端时,具体用于:According to some embodiments, the information transmission unit 2202 is configured to transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, specifically for:
若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中除第一张发送卡和最后一张发送卡之外的任一发送卡,且信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则经第一路由网口获取回传信息;If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then the first routing network Port to obtain the return information;
将回传信息经第一发送卡网口、第三发送卡的第三路由网口传输至第三发送卡,第三路由网口与第一发送卡网口连接,回传信息为第二发送卡经第二发送卡网口和第二路由口传输的;The return information is transmitted to the third sending card through the network port of the first sending card and the third routing network port of the third sending card, and the third routing network port is connected to the network port of the first sending card, and the returned information is the second sending card. The card transmits through the network port of the second sending card and the second routing port;
第三发送卡为发送卡集合中与第一发送卡相邻的上一张发送卡。The third sending card is the last sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set.
根据一些实施例,信息传输子单元2213,用于若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则将区域控制信息经第一路由网口、第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口发送至第二发送卡时,具体用于:According to some embodiments, the information transmission subunit 2213 is configured to send the area control information to When the second sending card is used specifically for:
若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中除第一张发送卡和最后一张发送卡之外的任一发送卡,且信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则经第一路由网口将区域控制信息传输至路由模块;区域控制信息为第三发送卡经第三发送卡的第三路由网口和第一发送卡网口传输的,第三路由网口与第一发送卡网口连接,第三发送卡为发送卡集合中与第一发送卡相邻的上一张发送卡;If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then the first routing network The area control information is transmitted to the routing module through the port; the area control information is transmitted by the third sending card through the third routing network port of the third sending card and the network port of the first sending card, and the third routing network port and the network port of the first sending card port connection, the third sending card is the last sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set;
控制路由模块经第二路由网口和第二发送卡网口将区域控制信息发送至第二发送卡。The control routing module sends the area control information to the second sending card through the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
根据一些实施例,网络地址配置单元2204,用于获取第一发送卡的排序信息之后,若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡,则控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址。According to some embodiments, the network address configuration unit 2204 is configured to, after obtaining the sorting information of the first sending card, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, then control the routing module to the first sending card The routing network port is configured with the first network address.
根据一些实施例,信息传输单元2202,用于若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口传输至终端时,具体用于:According to some embodiments, the information transmission unit 2202 is configured to transmit the returned information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, specifically for:
若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡,且信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第一发送卡网口和第三发送卡的第三路由网口传输至第三发送卡;If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then the return information will be passed through the network port of the first sending card and the third sending card of the third sending card. The third routing network port transmits to the third sending card;
第三发送卡为发送卡集合中与第一发送卡相邻的上一张发送卡,第三路由网口与第一发送卡网口连接。The third sending card is the last sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, and the third routing network port is connected to the network port of the first sending card.
根据一些实施例,信息传输子单元2213,用于若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作时,具体用于:According to some embodiments, the information transmission subunit 2213 is configured to control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, specifically for:
若排序信息指示第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡,且信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card for display operation.
根据一些实施例,显示操作单元2203,用于若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作时,具体用于:According to some embodiments, the display operation unit 2203 is configured to control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, specifically for:
解析区域控制信息,获取区域控制信息中的识别码集合;Analyzing the area control information to obtain a set of identification codes in the area control information;
若识别码集合中包括第一发送卡的识别码,则基于区域控制信息控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。If the identification code set includes the identification code of the first sending card, the screen area corresponding to the first sending card is controlled to perform a display operation based on the area control information.
需要说明的是,上述实施例提供的屏幕区域控制装置在执行屏幕区域控制方法时,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将设备的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。另外,上述实施例提供的屏幕区域控制装置与屏幕区域控制方法实施例属于同一构思,其体现实现过程详见方法实施例,这里不再赘述。It should be noted that, when the screen area control device provided in the above-mentioned embodiments executes the screen area control method, the division of the above-mentioned functional modules is used as an example for illustration. In practical applications, the above-mentioned functions can be assigned to different function modules as required Module completion means that the internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above. In addition, the screen area control device provided in the above embodiments and the screen area control method embodiments belong to the same idea, and the implementation process thereof is detailed in the method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
上述本申请实施例序号仅仅为了描述,不代表实施例的优劣。The serial numbers of the above embodiments of the present application are for description only, and do not represent the advantages and disadvantages of the embodiments.
在本申请一个或多个实施例中,通过类型获取单元基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型,若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则信息传输单元将回传信息经第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口传输至终端,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则显示操作单元基于区域控制信息,控制第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,区域控制信息是经第一发送卡网口从终端获取的。因此屏幕区域控制装置基于路由模块获取传输信息时,可以采用网络传输方式进行信息传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高传输信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性。In one or more embodiments of the present application, the type acquisition unit acquires the transmission information based on the routing module, and acquires the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the information transmission unit passes the return information through the first A routing network port and the network port of the first sending card are transmitted to the terminal. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, the display operation unit controls the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform display operations based on the area control information. The area control The information is obtained from the terminal through the network port of the first sending card. Therefore, when the screen area control device obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, it can use the network transmission method for information transmission without using the serial port method to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information, reduce the screen control time, and increase the screen control speed. The first sending card is provided with a routing module, which can reduce the steps of network address setting, reduce the steps of screen control, and improve the convenience of screen area control.
请参见图26,图26示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图。具体的:Please refer to FIG. 26 , which shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application. specific:
S701,基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型;S701. Obtain the transmission information based on the routing module, and obtain the information type of the transmission information;
根据一些实施例,图27示出本申请实施例一种屏幕区域控制方法的背景示意图。如图27所示,信息传输的速度受串口速度的影响,例如使用115200波特率传输信息时,每秒仅能传输14k。因此,如27所示的信息传输方法存在信息传输速度慢,导致屏幕区域控制较差的情况。According to some embodiments, FIG. 27 shows a schematic background diagram of a screen area control method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 27, the speed of information transmission is affected by the speed of the serial port. For example, when using 115200 baud rate to transmit information, only 14k per second can be transmitted. Therefore, the information transmission method shown in 27 has a slow information transmission speed, resulting in poor control of the screen area.
易于理解的是,图28示出本申请实施例一种屏幕区域控制方法的系统架构图。如图28所示,本申请实施例仅包括一张发送卡和一个终端,本申请实施例应用于发送卡,即本申请实施例的执行主体为发送卡,该发送卡包括路由模块、第一路由网口和第二路由网口。It is easy to understand that FIG. 28 shows a system architecture diagram of a screen area control method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 28, the embodiment of the present application includes only one sending card and one terminal. A routing network port and a second routing network port.
易于理解的是,路由网口是指与路由模块相连接的网口,第一路由网口是指用于路由模块和发送卡连接的网口。路由模块是指模块化路由器。该路由模块的类型基于连接功能和管理功能决定的。例如,网口的类型发生变化时,该路由模块也会相应变化。It is easy to understand that the routing network port refers to the network port connected to the routing module, and the first routing network port refers to the network port used to connect the routing module and the sending card. A routing module refers to a modular router. The type of the routing module is determined based on the connection function and the management function. For example, when the type of the network port changes, the routing module will also change accordingly.
根据一些实施例,发送卡中包括路由模块,在对发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行控制时,基于路由模块,发送卡可以获取到传输信息。当发送卡基于路由模块获取到传输信息时,发送卡可以获取该传输信息的信息类型。信息类型是指传输信息所属的类型,该信息类型并不特指某一固定信息类型。例如当传输信息发生变化时,该传输信息对应的信息类型也会相应变化。According to some embodiments, the sending card includes a routing module, and when controlling the screen area corresponding to the sending card, the sending card can obtain transmission information based on the routing module. When the sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, the sending card can obtain the information type of the transmission information. The information type refers to the type of the transmitted information, and the information type does not specifically refer to a certain fixed information type. For example, when the transmission information changes, the information type corresponding to the transmission information will also change accordingly.
S702,若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第二路由网口传输至终端;S702. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, transmit the return information to the terminal through the second routing network port;
根据一些实施例,回传信息是指发送卡获取到的且传输至终端的信息。发送卡获取到的回传信息可以是直接基于用户的回传指令获取到的,还可以是用户经发送卡对应的屏幕区域上输入的回传指令,还可以是发送卡自身生成的回传指令。发送卡自身生成的回传指令例如可以是当发送卡检测到控制发送卡对应的屏幕区域的显示操作完成时生成的回传指令。According to some embodiments, the returned information refers to the information acquired by the sending card and transmitted to the terminal. The return information obtained by the sending card can be obtained directly based on the user's return instruction, or it can be a return instruction entered by the user through the corresponding screen area of the sending card, or it can be a return instruction generated by the sending card itself . The return instruction generated by the sending card itself may be, for example, a return instruction generated when the sending card detects that the display operation of controlling the screen area corresponding to the sending card is completed.
易于理解的是,基于路由模块,发送卡可以获取到传输信息。当发送卡获取到传输信息时,发送卡可以获取该传输信息的信息类型。若发送卡确定该信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息时,发送卡可以将回传信息经第二路由网口传输至终端。It is easy to understand that, based on the routing module, the sending card can obtain the transmission information. When the sending card obtains the transmission information, the sending card can obtain the information type of the transmission information. If the sending card determines that the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the sending card may transmit the return information to the terminal through the second routing network port.
S703,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。S703. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform a display operation.
根据一些实施例,区域控制信息是指发送卡获取到的,且指示发送卡对发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作的信息。该区域控制信息为终端经第二路由网口传输至路由模块的,即发送卡可以通过第二路由网口获取到终端发送的区域控制信息。According to some embodiments, the area control information refers to information acquired by the sending card and instructing the sending card to perform a display operation on the screen area corresponding to the sending card. The area control information is transmitted by the terminal to the routing module through the second routing network port, that is, the sending card can obtain the area control information sent by the terminal through the second routing network port.
易于理解的是,基于路由模块,发送卡可以获取到传输信息。当发送卡获取到传输信息时,发送卡可以获取该传输信息的信息类型。若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,发送卡可以控制发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。例如,用户可以在终端上输入区域控制信息,该区域控制信息包括但不限于以语音形式输入的控制信息、以文字形式输入的控制信息以及点击形式输入的控制信息、或者其他终端传输至该终端的信息等等。It is easy to understand that, based on the routing module, the sending card can obtain the transmission information. When the sending card obtains the transmission information, the sending card can obtain the information type of the transmission information. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, the sending card can control the corresponding screen area of the sending card to perform display operations. For example, the user can input area control information on the terminal, the area control information includes but not limited to control information input in the form of voice, control information input in the form of text and control information input in the form of clicking, or other terminal transmission to the terminal information and so on.
可选的,当终端接收到用户在终端显示屏上点击输入的区域控制信息时,终端可以将该区域控制信经终端网口和第二路由网口传输至发送卡。发送卡获取到该区域控制信息时,可以基于该区域控制信息控制与发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。Optionally, when the terminal receives the area control information input by the user clicking on the display screen of the terminal, the terminal may transmit the area control information to the sending card via the terminal network port and the second routing network port. When the sending card acquires the area control information, it can control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform display operations based on the area control information.
在本申请一个或多个实施例中,通过基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型,若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第二路由网口传输至终端,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,可以采用网络传输方式进行信息传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高传输信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性,扩展屏幕区域控制的适用范围。In one or more embodiments of the present application, by obtaining the transmission information based on the routing module, the information type of the transmission information is obtained. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the return information is transmitted to the For the terminal, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, the screen area corresponding to the sending card is controlled to perform display operations, and the network transmission method can be used for information transmission, and there is no need to use the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can improve the transmission efficiency. The transmission speed of information reduces the screen control time and improves the screen control speed. At the same time, because the first sending card is equipped with a routing module, it can reduce the network address setting steps, reduce the screen control steps, improve the convenience of screen area control, and expand the screen area. The scope of application of the control.
请参见图29,图29示出本申请实施例提供的一种屏幕区域控制方法的流程示意图。具体的:Please refer to FIG. 29 , which shows a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a screen area provided by an embodiment of the present application. specific:
S801,控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址;S801. Control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port;
根据一些实施例,在发送卡基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型之前,发送卡可以控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址。第一网络地址是指与第一路由网口对应的网络地址,该第一网络地址并不特指某一固定网络地址。例如每次发送卡每次开机时,可以控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置一次第一网络地址,相邻两次配置的第一网络地址可以不相同。According to some embodiments, before the sending card obtains the transmission information and the information type of the transmission information based on the routing module, the sending card may control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port. The first network address refers to a network address corresponding to the first routing network port, and the first network address does not specifically refer to a certain fixed network address. For example, each time the sending card is turned on, the routing module can be controlled to configure the first network address to the first routing network port once, and the first network address configured twice adjacently can be different.
易于理解的是,如图28所示,Q发送卡的第二路由网口和M终端的终端网口通过网线连接。当Q发送卡基于q理由模块获取传输信息之前,Q发送卡可以控制q路由模块向q1路由网口配置第一网口地址。It is easy to understand that, as shown in Figure 28, the second routing network port of the Q sending card is connected to the terminal network port of the M terminal through a network cable. Before the Q sending card obtains the transmission information based on the q reason module, the Q sending card can control the q routing module to configure the first network port address to the q1 routing network port.
S802,控制路由模块经第二路由网口向终端网口配置第二网络地址;S802, controlling the routing module to configure the second network address to the terminal network port through the second routing network port;
根据一些实施例,在发送卡基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型之前,发送卡可以控制路由模块经第二路由网口向终端网口配置第二网络地址。其中,发送卡的第二路由网口和终端网口连接。若发送卡设置有发送卡网口,在本实施例中无需使用该发送卡网口。According to some embodiments, before the sending card obtains the transmission information and the information type of the transmission information based on the routing module, the sending card may control the routing module to configure the second network address to the terminal network port through the second routing network port. Wherein, the second routing network port of the sending card is connected to the terminal network port. If the sending card is provided with a network port of the sending card, the network port of the sending card does not need to be used in this embodiment.
易于理解的是,S801和S802的执行顺序可以是同时执行,也可以是S802在S801之前执行。It is easy to understand that, the execution order of S801 and S802 may be executed simultaneously, or S802 may be executed before S801.
S803,基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型;S803, acquire the transmission information based on the routing module, and acquire the information type of the transmission information;
具体过程如上所述,此处不再赘述。The specific process is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
S804,若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第二路由网口传输至终端;S804. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, transmit the return information to the terminal through the second routing network port;
具体过程如上所述,此处不再赘述。The specific process is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
根据一些实施例,回传信息为经第一路由网口获取的。当发送卡基于路由模块获取到传输信息时,发送卡可以获取该传输信息的信息类型。若发送卡确定该信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则发送卡可以获取第二网络地址,并将该回传信息经第二路由网口传输至第二网络地址对应的终端网口,以便发送卡可以将该回传信息传输至终端。According to some embodiments, the returned information is obtained through the first routing network port. When the sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, the sending card can obtain the information type of the transmission information. If the sending card determines that the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the sending card can obtain the second network address, and transmit the return information to the terminal network port corresponding to the second network address through the second routing network port, so that The sending card can transmit the returned information to the terminal.
S805,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。S805. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform a display operation.
具体过程如上所述,此处不再赘述。The specific process is as described above, and will not be repeated here.
根据一些实施例,当终端获取到信息传输指令时,终端可以基于终端网口的第二网络地址将信息经第二路由网口传输至第一发送卡。当发送卡基于路由模块获取到传输信息时,发送卡可以获取该传输信息的信息类型。若发送卡确定该信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制发送卡对 应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。According to some embodiments, when the terminal obtains the information transmission instruction, the terminal may transmit the information to the first sending card through the second routing network port based on the second network address of the terminal network port. When the sending card obtains the transmission information based on the routing module, the sending card can obtain the information type of the transmission information. If the sending card determines that the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, it will control the corresponding screen area of the sending card to perform display operations based on the area control information.
在本申请一个或多个实施例中,通过控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,控制路由模块经第二路由网口向终端网口配置第二网络地址,基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型,若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第二路由网口传输至终端,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。因此,在没有外部路由器时,路由模块可以向终端网口配置网络地址,使得终端和发送卡可以采用网络传输方式进行信息传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高传输信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性,扩展屏幕区域控制的适用范围。In one or more embodiments of the present application, the routing module is controlled to configure the first network address to the first routing network port, and the routing module is controlled to configure the second network address to the terminal network port through the second routing network port. Transmission information, to obtain the information type of the transmission information, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then transmit the return information to the terminal through the second routing network port, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then based on the area Control information, control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform display operations. Therefore, when there is no external router, the routing module can configure the network address to the network port of the terminal, so that the terminal and the sending card can use the network transmission method for information transmission, without using the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can increase the transmission speed of the transmission information and reduce The screen control time improves the screen control speed. At the same time, because the first sending card is provided with a routing module, the network address setting steps can be reduced, the screen control steps can be reduced, the convenience of screen area control is improved, and the scope of application of screen area control is expanded.
下述为本申请装置实施例,可以用于执行本申请方法实施例。对于本申请装置实施例中未披露的细节,请参照本申请方法实施例。The following are device embodiments of the present application, which can be used to implement the method embodiments of the present application. For details not disclosed in the device embodiments of the present application, please refer to the method embodiments of the present application.
请参见图30,其示出了本申请一个示例性实施例提供的屏幕区域控制装置的结构示意图。该屏幕区域控制装置可以通过软件、硬件或者两者的结合实现成为装置的全部或一部分。该屏幕区域控制装置3000包括路由模块、第一路由网口和第二路由网口,该屏幕区域控制装置3000包括传输信息获取单元3001、回传信息传输单元3002和区域控制单元3003,其中:Please refer to FIG. 30 , which shows a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for controlling a screen area provided by an exemplary embodiment of the present application. The device for controlling the screen area can be implemented as all or a part of the device through software, hardware or a combination of the two. The screen area control device 3000 includes a routing module, a first routing network port, and a second routing network port. The screen area control device 3000 includes a transmission information acquisition unit 3001, a return information transmission unit 3002, and an area control unit 3003, wherein:
传输信息获取单元3001,用于基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型;The transmission information obtaining unit 3001 is configured to obtain the transmission information based on the routing module, and obtain the information type of the transmission information;
回传信息传输单元3002,用于若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则将回传信息经第二路由网口传输至终端,回传信息为经第一路由网口获取的;The return information transmission unit 3002 is configured to transmit the return information to the terminal through the second routing network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, and the return information is obtained through the first routing network port;
区域控制单元3003,用于若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于区域控制信息,控制发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,区域控制信息为终端经第二路由网口传输至路由模块的。The area control unit 3003 is used to control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform display operations based on the area control information if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, and the area control information is transmitted to the routing module by the terminal through the second routing network port of.
根据一些实施例,图31示出本申请实施例一种屏幕区域控制装置的结构示意图。如图31所示,该屏幕区域控制装置3100还包括地址配置单元3104,用于基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型之前,控制路由模块向第一路由网口配置第一网络地址;According to some embodiments, FIG. 31 shows a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for controlling a screen area according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 31, the screen area control device 3100 also includes an address configuration unit 3104, configured to obtain transmission information based on the routing module, and control the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port before obtaining the information type of the transmission information ;
控制路由模块经第二路由网口向终端网口配置第二网络地址,第二路由网口和终端网口连接。The control routing module configures the second network address to the terminal network port through the second routing network port, and the second routing network port is connected to the terminal network port.
在本申请一个或多个实施例中,通过传输信息获取单元基于路由模块获取传输信息,获取传输信息的信息类型,若信息类型指示传输信息为回传信息,则回传信息传输单元将回传信息经第二路由网口传输至终端,回传信息为经第一路由网口获取的,若信息类型指示传输信息为区域控制信息,则区域控制单元基于区域控制信息,控制发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,区域控制信息为终端经第二路由网口传输至路由模块的,因此终端和屏幕区域控制装置可以采用网络传输方式进行信息传输,无需采用串口方式获取传输信息,可以提高传输信息的传输速度,减少屏幕控制时间,提高屏幕控制速度,同时由于第一发送卡设置有路由模块,可以减少网络地址设置步骤,可以减少屏幕控制步骤,提高屏幕区域控制的便利性,扩展屏幕区域控制的适用范围。In one or more embodiments of the present application, the transmission information is obtained by the transmission information acquisition unit based on the routing module, and the information type of the transmission information is obtained. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, the return information transmission unit will return The information is transmitted to the terminal through the second routing network port, and the returned information is obtained through the first routing network port. If the information type indicates that the transmission information is regional control information, the regional control unit controls the screen corresponding to the sending card based on the regional control information. The display operation is carried out in the area, and the area control information is transmitted from the terminal to the routing module through the second routing network port. Therefore, the terminal and the screen area control device can use the network transmission method for information transmission, and there is no need to use the serial port to obtain the transmission information, which can improve the transmission information. The transmission speed reduces the screen control time and improves the screen control speed. At the same time, because the first sending card is equipped with a routing module, it can reduce the network address setting steps, reduce the screen control steps, improve the convenience of screen area control, and expand the screen area control. scope of application.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机存储介质,所述计算机存储介质可以存储有多条指令,所述指令适于由处理器加载并执行如上述图3-图21或图26-图29所示实施例的所述屏幕区域控制方法,具体执行过程可以参见图3-图21或图26-图29所示实施例的具体说明,在此不进行赘述。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer storage medium, the computer storage medium can store a plurality of instructions, the instructions are suitable for being loaded and executed by the processor The screen area control method of the illustrated embodiment, the specific execution process can refer to the specific description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 3-21 or 26-29, and details are not repeated here.
本申请还提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品存储有至少一条指令,所述至少一条指令由所述处理器加载并执行如上述图3-图21或图26-图29所示实施例的所述屏幕区域控制方法,具体执行过程可以参见图3-图21或图26-图29所示实施例的具体说明,在此不进行赘述。The present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product stores at least one instruction, and the at least one instruction is loaded and executed by the processor as shown in the above-mentioned Fig. 3-Fig. 21 or Fig. 26- Fig. 29 For the screen area control method of the example, the specific execution process can refer to the specific description of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 3-21 or 26-29, and details are not repeated here.
请参见图32,为本申请实施例提供的一种发送卡的结构示意图。如图32所示,所述发送卡3200可以包括:至少一个处理器3201,至少一个网络接口3204,用户接口3203,存储器3205,至少一个通信总线3202。Please refer to FIG. 32 , which is a schematic structural diagram of a sending card provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 32 , the sending card 3200 may include: at least one processor 3201 , at least one network interface 3204 , a user interface 3203 , a memory 3205 , and at least one communication bus 3202 .
其中,通信总线3202用于实现这些组件之间的连接通信。Wherein, the communication bus 3202 is used to realize connection and communication between these components.
其中,用户接口3203可以包括显示屏,可选用户接口3203还可以包括标准的有线接口、无线接口。Wherein, the user interface 3203 may include a display screen, and the optional user interface 3203 may also include a standard wired interface and a wireless interface.
其中,网络接口3204可选的可以包括标准的有线接口、无线接口(如WI-FI接口)。Wherein, the network interface 3204 may optionally include a standard wired interface and a wireless interface (such as a WI-FI interface).
其中,处理器3201可以包括一个或者多个处理核心。处理器3201利用各种借口和线路连接整个发送卡3200内的各个部分,通过运行或执行存储在存储器3205内的指令、程序、代码集或指令集,以及调用存储在存储器3205内的数据,执行发送卡3200的各种功能和处理数据。可选的,处理器3201可以采用数字信号处理(Digital Signal Processing,DSP)、现场可编程门阵列(Field-Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)、可编程逻辑阵列(Programmable Logic Array,PLA)中的至少一种硬件形式来实现。处理器3201可集成中央处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU)、图像处理器(Graphics Processing Unit,GPU)和调制解调器等中的一种或几种的组合。其中,CPU主要处理操作系统、用户界面和应用程序等;GPU用于负责显示屏所需要显示的内容的渲染和绘制;调制解调器用于处理无线通信。可以理解的是,上述调制解调器也可以不集成到处理器3201中,单独通过一块芯片进行实现。Wherein, the processor 3201 may include one or more processing cores. The processor 3201 uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts in the entire sending card 3200, by running or executing instructions, programs, code sets or instruction sets stored in the memory 3205, and calling data stored in the memory 3205 to execute Various functions of the sending card 3200 and processing data. Optionally, the processor 3201 may adopt at least one of Digital Signal Processing (Digital Signal Processing, DSP), Field-Programmable Gate Array (Field-Programmable Gate Array, FPGA), and Programmable Logic Array (Programmable Logic Array, PLA). implemented in the form of hardware. The processor 3201 may integrate one or a combination of a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, CPU), an image processor (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU) and a modem. Among them, the CPU mainly handles the operating system, user interface and application programs, etc.; the GPU is used to render and draw the content that needs to be displayed on the display screen; the modem is used to handle wireless communication. It can be understood that, the above-mentioned modem may also not be integrated into the processor 3201, but implemented by a single chip.
其中,存储器3205可以包括随机存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),也可以包括只读存储器(Read-Only Memory)。可选的,该存储器3205包括非瞬时性计算机可读介质(non-transitory computer-readable storage medium)。存储器3205可用于存储指令、程序、代码、代码集或指令集。存储器3205可包括存储程序区和存储数据区,其中,存储程序区可存储用于实现操作系统的指令、用于至少一个功能的指令(比如触控功能、声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)、用于实现上述各个方法实施例的指令等;存储数据区可存储上面各个方法实施例中涉及到的数据等。存储器3205可选的还可以是至少一个位于远离前述处理器3201的存储装置。如图32所示,作为一种计算机存储介质的存储器3205中可以包括操作系统、网络通信模块、用户接口模块以及用于屏幕区域控制的应用程序。Wherein, the memory 3205 may include random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), and may also include read-only memory (Read-Only Memory). Optionally, the memory 3205 includes a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium (non-transitory computer-readable storage medium). The memory 3205 may be used to store instructions, programs, codes, sets of codes or sets of instructions. The memory 3205 may include a program storage area and a data storage area, wherein the program storage area may store instructions for implementing an operating system, instructions for at least one function (such as a touch function, a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), Instructions and the like for implementing the above method embodiments; the storage data area can store the data and the like involved in the above method embodiments. Optionally, the memory 3205 may also be at least one storage device located away from the aforementioned processor 3201 . As shown in FIG. 32 , the memory 3205 as a computer storage medium may include an operating system, a network communication module, a user interface module, and an application program for controlling a screen area.
在图32所示的发送卡3200中,用户接口3203主要用于为用户提供输入的接口,获取用户输入的数据;而处理器3201可以用于调用存储器3205中存储的屏幕区域控制的应用程序,并具体执行图图3-图21或图26-图29所示实施例的具体说明,在此不进行赘述。In the sending card 3200 shown in Figure 32, the user interface 3203 is mainly used to provide the user with an input interface to obtain the data input by the user; and the processor 3201 can be used to call the application program for controlling the screen area stored in the memory 3205, And specifically implement the specific descriptions of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 3-21 or 26-29 , and details are not repeated here.
除此之外,本领域技术人员可以理解,上述附图所示出的发送卡的结构并不构成对发送卡的限定,发送卡可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。比如,发送卡中还包括射频电路、输入单元、传感器、音频电路、无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)模块、电源、蓝牙模块等部件,在此不再赘述。In addition, those skilled in the art can understand that the structure of the sending card shown in the above drawings does not constitute a limitation on the sending card, and the sending card may include more or less components than those shown in the illustration, or combine certain some components, or a different arrangement of components. For example, the sending card also includes components such as a radio frequency circuit, an input unit, a sensor, an audio circuit, a wireless fidelity (WiFi) module, a power supply, and a Bluetooth module, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请实施例中,各步骤的执行主体可以是上文介绍的发送卡。可选地,各步骤的执行主体为发送卡的操作系统。操作系统可以是安卓系统,也可以是IOS系统,或者其它操作系统,本申请实施例对此不作限定。In the embodiment of the present application, the execution subject of each step may be the sending card described above. Optionally, the execution subject of each step is the operating system of the sending card. The operating system may be an Android system, an IOS system, or other operating systems, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例的发送卡,其上还可以安装有显示设备,显示设备可以是各种能实现显示功能的设备,例如:阴极射线管显示器(cathode ray tubedisplay,简称CR)、发光二极管显示器(light-emitting diode display,简称LED)、电子墨水屏、液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,简称LCD)、等离子显示面板(plasma display panel,简称PDP)等。用户可以利用发送卡上的显示设备,来查看显示的文字、图像、视频等信息。所述发送卡可以是智能手机、平板电脑、游戏设备、AR(Augmented Reality,增强现实)设备、汽车、数据存储装置、音频播放装置、视频播放装置、笔记本、桌面计算设备、可穿戴设备诸如电子手表、电子眼镜、电子头盔、电子手链、电子项链、电子衣物等设备。The sending card of the embodiment of the present application can also be equipped with a display device on it, and the display device can be various devices that can realize display functions, such as: a cathode ray tube display (cathode ray tube display, CR for short), a light emitting diode display (light -emitting diode display, referred to as LED), electronic ink screen, liquid crystal display (liquid crystal display, referred to as LCD), plasma display panel (plasma display panel, referred to as PDP), etc. Users can use the display device on the sending card to view displayed text, images, videos and other information. The sending card can be a smart phone, a tablet computer, a game device, an AR (Augmented Reality, augmented reality) device, a car, a data storage device, an audio playback device, a video playback device, a notebook, a desktop computing device, a wearable device such as an electronic Watches, electronic glasses, electronic helmets, electronic bracelets, electronic necklaces, electronic clothing and other equipment.
本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到本申请的技术方案可借助软件和/或硬件来实现。本说明书中的“单元”和“模块”是指能够独立完成或与其他部件配合完成特定功能的软件和/或硬件,其中硬件例如可以是现场可编程门阵列(Field-ProgrammaBLE Gate Array,FPGA)、集成电路(Integrated Circuit,IC)等。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that the technical solutions of the present application can be realized by means of software and/or hardware. "Unit" and "module" in this specification refer to software and/or hardware that can complete specific functions independently or in cooperation with other components, where the hardware can be, for example, Field Programmable Gate Array (Field-ProgrammaBLE Gate Array, FPGA) , Integrated Circuit (Integrated Circuit, IC), etc.
需要说明的是,对于前述的各方法实施例,为了简单描述,故将其都表述为一系列的动作组合,但是本领域技术人员应该知悉,本申请并不受所描述的动作顺序的限制,因为依据本申请,某些步骤可以采用其他顺序或者同时进行。其次,本领域技术人员也应该知悉,说明书中所描述的实施例均属于可选实施例,所涉及的动作和模块并不一定是本申请所必须的。It should be noted that for the foregoing method embodiments, for the sake of simple description, they are expressed as a series of action combinations, but those skilled in the art should know that the present application is not limited by the described action sequence. Depending on the application, certain steps may be performed in other orders or simultaneously. Secondly, those skilled in the art should also know that the embodiments described in the specification are all optional embodiments, and the actions and modules involved are not necessarily required by the application.
在上述实施例中,对各个实施例的描述都各有侧重,某个实施例中没有详述的部分,可以参见其他实施例的相关描述。In the foregoing embodiments, the descriptions of each embodiment have their own emphases, and for parts not described in detail in a certain embodiment, reference may be made to relevant descriptions of other embodiments.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的装置,可通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上 所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些服务接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed device can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components can be combined or can be Integrate into another system, or some features may be ignored, or not implemented. In another point, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some service interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储器中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对相关技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储器中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可为个人计算机、服务器或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储器包括:U盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、移动硬盘、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is realized in the form of a software function unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable memory. Based on this understanding, the essence of the technical solution of the present application or the part that contributes to the related technology or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of software products, and the computer software products are stored in a memory, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned memory includes: U disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), mobile hard disk, magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解上述实施例的各种方法中的全部或部分步骤是可以通进程序来指令相关的硬件来完成,该程序可以存储于一计算机可读存储器中,存储器可以包括:闪存盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁盘或光盘等。Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that all or part of the steps in the various methods of the above-mentioned embodiments can be completed by entering a program to instruct related hardware. The program can be stored in a computer-readable memory, and the memory can include: flash memory disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access device (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk, etc.
以上所述者,仅为本公开的示例性实施例,不能以此限定本公开的范围。即但凡依本公开教导所作的等效变化与修饰,皆仍属本公开涵盖的范围内。本领域技术人员在考虑说明书及实践这里的公开后,将容易想到本公开的其它实施方案。本申请旨在涵盖本公开的任何变型、用途或者适应性变化,这些变型、用途或者适应性变化遵循本公开的一般性原理并包括本公开未记载的本技术领域中的公知常识或惯用技术手段。说明书和实施例仅被视为示例性的,本公开的范围和精神由权利要求限定。What is described above is only an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure, and should not limit the scope of the present disclosure. That is, all equivalent changes and modifications made according to the teachings of the present disclosure still fall within the scope of the present disclosure. Other embodiments of the disclosure will be readily apparent to those skilled in the art from consideration of the specification and practice of the disclosure herein. This application is intended to cover any modification, use or adaptation of the present disclosure, and these modifications, uses or adaptations follow the general principles of the present disclosure and include common knowledge or conventional technical means in the technical field not described in the present disclosure . The specification and examples are to be considered exemplary only, with the scope and spirit of the present disclosure defined by the claims.

Claims (22)

  1. 一种屏幕区域控制方法,其中,应用于第一发送卡,所述第一发送卡包括路由模块、第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口,所述方法包括:A screen area control method, wherein it is applied to a first sending card, the first sending card includes a routing module, a first routing network port and a first sending card network port, and the method includes:
    基于所述路由模块获取传输信息,获取所述传输信息的信息类型;Obtaining transmission information based on the routing module, and obtaining the information type of the transmission information;
    若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则将所述回传信息经所述第一路由网口和所述第一发送卡网口传输至终端;If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then transmit the return information to the terminal through the first routing network port and the first sending card network port;
    若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于所述区域控制信息,控制所述第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,所述区域控制信息是经所述第一发送卡网口从所述终端获取的。If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, based on the area control information, the screen area corresponding to the first sending card is controlled to perform a display operation, and the area control information is transmitted through the first sending card. The card network port is obtained from the terminal.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述第一发送卡为发送卡集合中的任一发送卡,所述第一发送卡还包括第二路由网口,所述基于所述路由模块获取传输信息,获取所述传输信息的信息类型之前,还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set, the first sending card also includes a second routing network port, and the routing module obtains Transfer information, before obtaining the information type of the transfer information, also includes:
    获取所述第一发送卡的排序信息;Acquiring the sorting information of the first sending card;
    若所述排序信息指示所述第一发送卡为所述发送卡集合中最后一张发送卡之前的任一发送卡,则控制所述路由模块向所述第一路由网口配置第一网络地址,并经所述第二路由网口向第二发送卡的第二发送卡网口配置第二网络地址,所述第二路由网口和所述第二发送卡网口连接,所述第二发送卡为所述发送卡集合中与所述第一发送卡相邻的下一张发送卡。If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, then controlling the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port , and configure the second network address to the second sending card network port of the second sending card through the second routing network port, the second routing network port is connected to the second sending card network port, and the second The sending card is the next sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于所述区域控制信息,控制所述第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform display operations ,include:
    若所述排序信息指示所述第一发送卡为所述发送卡集合中最后一张发送卡之前的任一发送卡,且所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则将所述区域控制信息经所述第一路由网口、所述路由模块、所述第二路由网口和所述第二发送卡网口传输至所述第二发送卡;If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card before the last sending card in the sending card set, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then the The area control information is transmitted to the second sending card through the first routing network port, the routing module, the second routing network port and the second sending card network port;
    基于所述区域控制信息,控制所述第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。Based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,所述第一发送卡经所述第一发送卡网口连接至所述外部路由器,所述外部路由器与所述终端连接,所述基于所述路由模块获取传输信息,获取所述传输信息的信息类型之前,还包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the first sending card is connected to the external router through the network port of the first sending card, the external router is connected to the terminal, and the routing module based on the Before obtaining the transmission information, before obtaining the information type of the transmission information, it also includes:
    若所述排序信息指示所述第一发送卡为所述发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则经所述第一发送卡网口获取所述外部路由器向所述第一发送卡网口配置的第三网络地址。If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the set of sending cards, then obtain the information from the external router to the network port of the first sending card through the network port of the first sending card. Configured third network address.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其中,所述若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则将所述回传信息经所述第一路由网口和所述第一发送卡网口传输至终端,包括:The method according to claim 4, wherein, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then send the return information through the first routing network port and the first sending card The network port transmits to the terminal, including:
    若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则经所述第一路由网口获取所述回传信息;If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then obtain the return information through the first routing network port;
    经所述第一发送卡网口将所述回传信息传输至所述外部路由器,所述回传信息用于指示所述外部路由器将所述回传信息传输至所述终端。Transmitting the return information to the external router through the network port of the first sending card, the return information is used to instruct the external router to transmit the return information to the terminal.
  6. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其中,所述若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则将所述区域控制信息经所述第一路由网口、所述第二路由网口和所述第二发送卡网口传输至所述第二发送卡,包括:The method according to claim 4, wherein, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then transmitting the area control information through the first routing network port and the second routing network Port and the network port of the second sending card to transmit to the second sending card, including:
    若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则经所述第一路由网口将所述区域控制信息传输至所述路由模块,所述区域控制信息为获取所述终端经所述外部路由器和所述第一发送卡网口传输的;If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then transmit the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port, and the area control information is obtained by the terminal via the transmitted by the external router and the network port of the first sending card;
    控制所述路由模块经所述第二路由网口和所述第二发送卡网口将所述区域控制信息传输至所述第二发送卡。controlling the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card via the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
  7. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,所述第一发送卡网口与终端的终端网口连接,所述基于所述路由模块获取传输信息,获取所述传输信息的信息类型之前,还包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the network port of the first sending card is connected to the terminal network port of the terminal, and the acquisition of transmission information based on the routing module, before obtaining the information type of the transmission information, further includes :
    若所述排序信息指示所述第一发送卡为所述发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则经所述第一发送卡网口向所述终端网口配置第四网络地址。If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, configure a fourth network address to the network port of the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其中,所述若所述排序信息指示所述第一发送卡为所述发送卡集合中的第一张发送卡,则经所述第一发送卡网口向所述终端网口配置第四网络地址之后,还包括:The method according to claim 7, wherein, if the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the first sending card in the sending card set, the network port of the first sending card is sent to After the terminal network port is configured with the fourth network address, it also includes:
    接收地址修改指令;Receive address modification instructions;
    基于所述地址修改指令,对所述第一网络地址进行修改,得到修改后的第一网络地址,所述修改后的第一网络地址对应的第一网段和所述第四网络地址对应的第二网段相同。Based on the address modification instruction, modify the first network address to obtain a modified first network address, the first network segment corresponding to the modified first network address and the fourth network address corresponding The second network segment is the same.
  9. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其中,所述若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则将所述回传信息经所述第一路由网口和所述第一发送卡网口传输至终端,包括:The method according to claim 7, wherein, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then send the return information through the first routing network port and the first sending card The network port transmits to the terminal, including:
    若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则经所述第一路由网口获取所述回传信息;If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then obtain the return information through the first routing network port;
    经所述第一发送卡网口将所述回传信息传输至所述终端。and transmitting the feedback information to the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
  10. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其中,所述若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则将所述区域控制信息经所述第一路由网口、所述第二路由网口和所述第二发送卡网口传输至所述第二发送卡,包括:The method according to claim 7, wherein, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then transmitting the area control information through the first routing network port and the second routing network Port and the network port of the second sending card to transmit to the second sending card, including:
    若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则经所述第一路由网口将所述区域控制信息传输至所述路由模块,所述区域控制信息为获取所述终端经所述第一发送卡网口传输的;If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then transmit the area control information to the routing module through the first routing network port, and the area control information is obtained by the terminal via the The network port of the first sending card transmits;
    控制所述路由模块经所述第二路由网口和所述第二发送卡网口将所述区域控制信息传输至所述第二发送卡。controlling the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card via the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
  11. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,所述若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则将所述回传信息经所述第一路由网口和所述第一发送卡网口传输至终端,包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then send the return information through the first routing network port and the first sending card The network port transmits to the terminal, including:
    若所述排序信息指示所述第一发送卡为所述发送卡集合中除第一张发送卡和所述最后一张发送卡之外的任一发送卡,且所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则经所述第一路由网口获取所述回传信息;If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, and the information type indicates the transmission If the information is backhaul information, the backhaul information is obtained through the first routing network port;
    将所述回传信息经所述第一发送卡网口、第三发送卡的第三路由网口传输至所述第三发送卡,所述第三路由网口与所述第一发送卡网口连接,所述回传信息为所述第二发送卡经所述第二发送卡网口和所述第二路由口传输的;The return information is transmitted to the third sending card through the network port of the first sending card and the third routing network port of the third sending card, and the third routing network port is connected to the network port of the first sending card. port connection, the return information is transmitted by the second sending card via the network port of the second sending card and the second routing port;
    所述第三发送卡为所述发送卡集合中与所述第一发送卡相邻的上一张发送卡。The third sending card is the last sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set.
  12. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其中,所述若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则将所述区域控制信息经所述第一路由网口、所述第二路由网口和所述第二发送卡网口传输至所述第二发送卡,包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then transmitting the area control information through the first routing network port and the second routing network Port and the network port of the second sending card to transmit to the second sending card, including:
    若所述排序信息指示所述第一发送卡为所述发送卡集合中除第一张发送卡和所述最后一张发送卡之外的任一发送卡,且所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则经所述第一路由网口将所述区域控制信息传输至所述路由模块;所述区域控制信息为第三发送卡经所述第三发送卡的第三路由网口和所述第一发送卡网口传输的,所述第三路由网口与所述第一发送卡网口连接,所述第三发送卡为所述发送卡集合中与所述第一发送卡相邻的上一张发送卡;If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is any sending card in the sending card set except the first sending card and the last sending card, and the information type indicates the transmission If the information is area control information, then the area control information is transmitted to the routing module through the first routing network port; the area control information is the third routing network of the third sending card via the third sending card port and the network port of the first sending card, the third routing network port is connected to the network port of the first sending card, and the third sending card is connected to the first sending card in the set of sending cards The last sending card adjacent to the card;
    控制所述路由模块经所述第二路由网口和所述第二发送卡网口将所述区域控制信息传输至所述第二发送卡。controlling the routing module to transmit the area control information to the second sending card via the second routing network port and the second sending card network port.
  13. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述获取所述第一发送卡的排序信息之后,还包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein, after said obtaining the sorting information of the first sending card, further comprising:
    若所述排序信息指示所述第一发送卡为所述发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡,则控制所述路由模块向所述第一路由网口配置第一网络地址。If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, then controlling the routing module to configure the first network address to the first routing network port.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其中,所述若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则将所述回传信息经所述第一路由网口和所述第一发送卡网口传输至终端,包括:The method according to claim 13, wherein, if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then send the return information through the first routing network port and the first sending card The network port transmits to the terminal, including:
    若所述排序信息指示所述第一发送卡为所述发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡,且所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则将所述回传信息经所述第一发送卡网口和第三发送卡的第三路由网口传输至所述第三发送卡;If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then pass the return information through the The first sending card network port and the third routing network port of the third sending card are transmitted to the third sending card;
    所述第三发送卡为所述发送卡集合中与所述第一发送卡相邻的上一张发送卡,所述第三路由网口与所述第一发送卡网口连接。The third sending card is the last sending card adjacent to the first sending card in the sending card set, and the third routing network port is connected to the network port of the first sending card.
  15. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其中,所述若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于所述区域控制信息,控制所述第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,包括:The method according to claim 13, wherein if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation ,include:
    若所述排序信息指示所述第一发送卡为所述发送卡集合中的最后一张发送卡,且所述信息类型指示所 述传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于所述区域控制信息,控制所述第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。If the sorting information indicates that the first sending card is the last sending card in the sending card set, and the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then based on the area control information, control The screen area corresponding to the first sending card performs a display operation.
  16. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于所述区域控制信息,控制所述第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform display operations ,include:
    解析所述区域控制信息,获取所述区域控制信息中的识别码集合;Analyzing the area control information to obtain a set of identification codes in the area control information;
    若所述识别码集合中包括所述第一发送卡的识别码,则基于所述区域控制信息控制所述第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作。If the identification code set includes the identification code of the first sending card, control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information.
  17. 一种屏幕区域控制装置,其中,所述屏幕区域控制装置包括路由模块、第一路由网口和第一发送卡网口,所述装置包括:A screen area control device, wherein the screen area control device includes a routing module, a first routing network port and a first sending card network port, and the device includes:
    类型获取单元,用于基于所述路由模块获取传输信息,获取所述传输信息的信息类型;a type obtaining unit, configured to obtain transmission information based on the routing module, and obtain the information type of the transmission information;
    信息传输单元,用于若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则将所述回传信息经所述第一路由网口和所述第一发送卡网口传输至终端;An information transmission unit, configured to transmit the returned information to the terminal via the first routing network port and the first sending card network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information;
    显示操作单元,用于若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于所述区域控制信息,控制所述第一发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,所述区域控制信息是经所述第一发送卡网口从所述终端获取的。A display operation unit, configured to control the screen area corresponding to the first sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, and the area control information is Obtained from the terminal through the network port of the first sending card.
  18. 一种屏幕区域控制方法,其中,应用于发送卡,所述发送卡包括路由模块、第一路由网口和第二路由网口,所述方法包括:A screen area control method, wherein it is applied to a sending card, and the sending card includes a routing module, a first routing network port and a second routing network port, and the method includes:
    基于所述路由模块获取传输信息,获取所述传输信息的信息类型;Obtaining transmission information based on the routing module, and obtaining the information type of the transmission information;
    若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则将所述回传信息经所述第二路由网口传输至终端,所述回传信息为经所述第一路由网口获取的;If the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, then transmit the return information to the terminal through the second routing network port, and the return information is obtained through the first routing network port ;
    若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于所述区域控制信息,控制所述发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,所述区域控制信息为所述终端经所述第二路由网口传输至所述路由模块的。If the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, then based on the area control information, control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform display operations, and the area control information is that the terminal passes through the second The routing network port transmits to the routing module.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其中,所述基于所述路由模块获取传输信息,获取所述传输信息的信息类型之前,还包括:The method according to claim 18, wherein said acquiring transmission information based on said routing module, before acquiring the information type of said transmission information, further includes:
    控制所述路由模块向所述第一路由网口配置第一网络地址;controlling the routing module to configure a first network address to the first routing network port;
    控制所述路由模块经所述第二路由网口向终端网口配置第二网络地址,所述第二路由网口和终端网口连接。Controlling the routing module to configure a second network address to the terminal network port via the second routing network port, and the second routing network port is connected to the terminal network port.
  20. 一种屏幕区域控制装置,其中,所述屏幕区域控制装置包括路由模块、第一路由网口和第二路由网口,所述装置包括:A screen area control device, wherein the screen area control device includes a routing module, a first routing network port and a second routing network port, and the device includes:
    传输信息获取单元,用于基于所述路由模块获取传输信息,获取所述传输信息的信息类型;a transmission information acquisition unit, configured to acquire transmission information based on the routing module, and acquire the information type of the transmission information;
    回传信息传输单元,用于若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为回传信息,则将所述回传信息经所述第二路由网口传输至终端,所述回传信息为经所述第一路由网口获取的;A return information transmission unit, configured to transmit the return information to the terminal through the second routing network port if the information type indicates that the transmission information is return information, and the return information is passed through the Obtained by the above-mentioned first routing network port;
    区域控制单元,用于若所述信息类型指示所述传输信息为区域控制信息,则基于所述区域控制信息,控制所述发送卡对应的屏幕区域进行显示操作,所述区域控制信息为所述终端经所述第二路由网口传输至所述路由模块的。The area control unit is configured to control the screen area corresponding to the sending card to perform a display operation based on the area control information if the information type indicates that the transmission information is area control information, and the area control information is the area control information The terminal is transmitted to the routing module through the second routing network port.
  21. 一种发送卡,包括:处理器和存储器;其中,所述存储器存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序适于由所述处理器加载并执行如权利要求1~16或18~19任意一项的方法步骤。A sending card, comprising: a processor and a memory; wherein, the memory stores a computer program, and the computer program is adapted to be loaded and executed by the processor according to any one of claims 1-16 or 18-19 Method steps.
  22. 一种计算机存储介质,其中,所述计算机存储介质存储有多条指令,所述指令适于由处理器加载并执行如权利要求1~16或18~19任意一项的方法步骤。A computer storage medium, wherein the computer storage medium stores a plurality of instructions, the instructions are suitable for being loaded by a processor and executing the method steps according to any one of claims 1-16 or 18-19.
PCT/CN2022/098995 2021-06-21 2022-06-15 Screen area control method and apparatus, sending card, and storage medium WO2022267962A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110687631.5A CN115509475A (en) 2021-06-21 2021-06-21 Screen area control method and device, sending card and storage medium
CN202110687631.5 2021-06-21

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022267962A1 true WO2022267962A1 (en) 2022-12-29

Family

ID=84499556

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/098995 WO2022267962A1 (en) 2021-06-21 2022-06-15 Screen area control method and apparatus, sending card, and storage medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115509475A (en)
WO (1) WO2022267962A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9069519B1 (en) * 2013-12-31 2015-06-30 Ultravision Technologies, Llc Power and control system for modular multi-panel display system
CN105788519A (en) * 2014-12-25 2016-07-20 西安诺瓦电子科技有限公司 LED display screen system, data distributor, and display control method
US20170345363A1 (en) * 2016-05-31 2017-11-30 Anthem Displays, Llc Systems and methods for providing redundant data and power
CN209962605U (en) * 2019-05-09 2020-01-17 杭州海康威视数字技术股份有限公司 LED display screen and display system

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9069519B1 (en) * 2013-12-31 2015-06-30 Ultravision Technologies, Llc Power and control system for modular multi-panel display system
CN105788519A (en) * 2014-12-25 2016-07-20 西安诺瓦电子科技有限公司 LED display screen system, data distributor, and display control method
US20170345363A1 (en) * 2016-05-31 2017-11-30 Anthem Displays, Llc Systems and methods for providing redundant data and power
CN209962605U (en) * 2019-05-09 2020-01-17 杭州海康威视数字技术股份有限公司 LED display screen and display system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115509475A (en) 2022-12-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP4130963A1 (en) Object dragging method and device
CN110012328B (en) Method and device for interacting with smart television
US11106421B2 (en) Display method and system for wireless intelligent multi-screen display
CN104618793A (en) Information processing method and electronic equipment
US11991767B2 (en) Bluetooth communication system and related computer program product capable of reducing complexity of pairing bluetooth host device with bluetooth device set for user
US11579831B2 (en) Intelligent interactive all-in-one machine
CN105320119A (en) Remote controlling method and system for large-size screen and personal computer based on mobile intelligent terminal
JP2014146229A (en) Screen sharing system and central device
CN104571581A (en) Switching device and switching method for enabling multiple hosts to share display equipment
CN204117142U (en) Electronic device for providing instant switching and sharing of universal serial bus electronic equipment by host
CN115209393B (en) Data transmission method, system, electronic equipment and storage medium
CN110109594A (en) A kind of draw data sharing method, device, storage medium and equipment
CN113438148A (en) Message sending method, message sending device, computer readable storage medium and electronic equipment
WO2022267962A1 (en) Screen area control method and apparatus, sending card, and storage medium
CN105245438A (en) Content sharing method, content sharing device and content sharing system
CN104166527A (en) Method for extending user interfaces of application programs
US20230195403A1 (en) Information processing method and electronic device
CN113872849B (en) Message interaction method and device and electronic equipment
CN105892975B (en) A kind of management board of KVM
CN102638673B (en) Method for realizing video signal interaction on basis of all-in-one computers
CN113938638B (en) Operation method and operation system for virtually dividing display panel
CN112579016B (en) Annotating method, system, equipment and storage medium for courseware
CN217718546U (en) Intelligent interactive flat plate
WO2015149704A1 (en) Multi-input operation control method and apparatus
CN112579019B (en) Annotating method, system, equipment and storage medium for courseware

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22827457

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22827457

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1